JP7117053B1 - playground - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine having a characteristic light-emitting means is provided. A game machine includes light emitting means, a movable body unit having a movable body operable by being driven by a motor, and operating means, and the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness. be. In addition, the light emitting means may emit light when the motor is driven by operating the movable body by hand in a power cut state, and a current due to the back electromotive force generated by the motor flows. The light emitting means and the operating means are provided on a common substrate, and the position of the light emitting means is below the movable body. [Selection drawing] Fig. 89

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one of game machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light emitting means (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-296354 A

However, in conventional game machines, there is room for improvement in the light emitting means.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a characteristic light-emitting means.

A game table according to the present invention is a movable body unit having first light emitting means provided on a first substrate, second light emitting means provided on a power supply device, and a movable body operable by being driven by a motor. and an operating means provided in the power supply device , wherein the motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness, The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness, and the power supply device is electrically connected to the first substrate via a second harness. The first light emitting means is configured to drive the motor by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state, and the electric current generated by the back electromotive force generated by the motor passes through the first harness. The second light emitting means operates the movable body by hand to drive the motor in a power failure state, and the current due to the back electromotive force generated by the motor is Light may be emitted by passing through the first harness and then flowing in through the second harness , and the first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven, The second light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven, the position of the second light emitting means is below the movable body, and the first light emitting means is , wherein the electric power from the power supply device is supplied without passing through the first harness, the gaming table is a slot machine, and the movable unit is a reel unit. It's a playground.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a characteristic light-emitting means.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention with its front door opened; FIG. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a controller of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention; (a) A plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. (b) A diagram showing pay lines of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. (a) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-coin bet game. (a) A transition diagram of a game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (b) is a transition diagram of an AT system game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100; (a) A diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination. (b) It is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order of the pushing order of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is the figure which corresponded the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127. FIG. (a) shows an image of an effect table provided in the first sub-controller 400; (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the judgment state production|presentation table. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (d) is a diagram showing a modified example of the LMT state rendering table. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 404 of a first sub-controller 400; 4B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400; (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 504 of a second sub-controller 500; (b) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (d) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (A) It is a diagram showing in chronological order changes in the image display and sound mode when the player selects the BGM sound using the operation means during the AT game. (B) is a diagram showing an example of image display. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration display. (B) is a diagram showing an example of game information display. (A) is a diagram showing an example of transition from normal background display to demonstration display. (B) It is a diagram showing an example of transitioning from the demonstration display to the game information display and then shifting to the demonstration display again. (A) is a diagram showing an example of transitioning from demonstration display to normal background display and then transitioning to demonstration display again. (B) is a diagram showing an example in which the demo display shifts to the game information display, then shifts to the normal background display, and then shifts to the demo display again. (A) is a diagram showing an example in which the demo display shifts to the game information display, further shifts to the setting confirmation display, and then shifts to the demo display again. (B) is a diagram showing an example of moving to a demonstration display again with the settlement operation as a trigger. (A) is a diagram showing an example in which the light emission color of the lamp is not interlocked when the mode of the lighting effect by the lamp and the sound effect by the speaker which are executed in parallel are changed. (B) is a diagram showing an example in which the light emission color of the lamp is linked to the background effect when the mode of the light emission effect by the lamp and the background effect by the liquid crystal display device, which are executed in parallel, changes. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a controller of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts and operations. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention It is a flow chart showing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a panel elimination effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating another example of the panel elimination effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the execution time of the panel clear effect and the operation invalid time of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a figure explaining the panel attack production|presentation of Example L1 of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention (modification). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of effects of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB1 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a small winning symbol notification effect in a BB1 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB2 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB2 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effects of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect from a first stop operation to a third stop operation in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention with its front door opened; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting|reporting aspect of the alerting|reporting means at the time of a 2nd error having generate|occur|produced in a certain game and performing 1st error alerting|reporting and 2nd error alerting|reporting. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the notification means when the 3rd error generate|occur|produced in a certain game and the 1st error notification and the 3rd error notification are performed. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the notification means at the time of the 4th error having generate|occur|produced in a certain game and performing the 4th error display. It is the figure which showed the flow from lever ON to error cancellation|release when the 4th error generate|occur|produced in a certain game and the 4th error display is performed. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. (a) It is the figure which showed the item given in point specialization state production, and the point corresponding to each item. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st provision production|presentation in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd provision production|presentation (refill production|presentation) in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st provision production|presentation in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd provision production|presentation (refill production|presentation) in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the 3rd addition production|presentation (refill production of the refill production) in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payouts before and after the slot machine is powered off and restored. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payout and error notification before and after power interruption/recovery of the slot machine. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations for each RT; 4 is a transition diagram of a game state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100; 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a button body 610 that constitutes the push button 600. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing a push button 600; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between a button body 610 and a detection sensor 710; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the push button 600; 6 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of a button body 610 and a detection sensor 710. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration in which the thickness direction of a substrate 700 is perpendicular to the pressing direction of a button body 610; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display on the effect image display device 157. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation; FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an operation example when a chance button 190 is operated between a bet operation and a start operation; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation; FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an operation example when a chance button 190 is operated between a bet operation and a start operation; 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with its front door opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a reel unit 700; (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 83; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194; It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. It is a figure which shows the connection example of each board|substrate and each unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing how the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. (a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 83 viewed obliquely from above, and (b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disc 182 is manually rotated. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 89 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. 89; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demonstration effect; (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing the display screen. It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed when the 1st chance button 165 is pushed down in the state shown to 97(h). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing step by step how the effect image display device 157 and various lamps appear when the power saving mode is selected while the non-demonstration animation is being displayed. FIG. 96 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 95; The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the front door 102 is opened while the opening/closing piece is pressed while the demo animation is displayed and the power saving mode is selected. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; FIG. 98 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 97; FIG. The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to open the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece while the demonstration animation is being displayed and to set the power saving mode is performed step by step. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, step by step, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error is still occurring. It is a figure which shows two examples of operation production|presentation. FIG. 82 is a table summarizing characteristic operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81; FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the relationship of colors in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81; It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 1st operation production|presentation 1 demonstrated using Fig.102 (a). It is a figure which shows concretely some examples of the 1st operation production|presentation 2 demonstrated using FIG.102(b). It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 2nd operation production|presentation 1 demonstrated using FIG.102(c). It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 2nd operation production|presentation 2 demonstrated using FIG.102(d). It is a figure which shows the other example of operation production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where an operation means other than the first chance button 165 is operated in the operation effect; It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine which can apply this invention from the back side.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment 1]
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. The light projecting portion of this optical sensor and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a production lamp.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the whole of the display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is stored. A case 220 is provided. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the controller.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combination, and stopping of reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 19 on the left reel 110 has a "bell pattern", the frame numbered 19 on the middle reel 111 has a "blank pattern", and the frame numbered 18 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 2 Designs” are arranged respectively. In the following description, "Seven 1 pattern" may be referred to as "Blue 7 (design)", and "Seven 2 design" may be referred to as "Red 7 (design)".

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 4(b). FIG. 4(b) is a diagram showing pay lines of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 1) is displayed on the left reel upper stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 2). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 3) is the left reel bottom stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the figure). (also referred to as symbol position 4) is the middle reel upper stage symbol, the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle stage symbol, The symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 6) is displayed on the middle reel lower stage symbol and the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 7). The symbol displayed is the right reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 112 (the position of 8 in the figure; also called symbol position 8) is the right reel middle stage symbol, and the right reel 112 lower stage symbol (9 shown in the figure) position (also referred to as symbol position 9) are called right reel lower symbols, and each symbol on each reel 110 to 112 is vertically three-dimensionally displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through a symbol display window 113. , a total of nine are displayed.

In this embodiment, one prize line 114 is provided, which is a middle prize line L1 composed of a left reel middle pattern (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle pattern (symbol position 5) and a right reel middle pattern (symbol position 8). ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a symbol stop position that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination to be described later with reference to FIGS. It is the line on which it is determined whether or not the combination is displayed. FIG. 4(b) shows the middle winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment can bet three or two, and when the number of inserted medals is less than two, none of the winning lines are activated and three or two medals are placed. The winning line L1 becomes effective when a coin is betted. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 .

Also, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three pay lines 114 may be set as the valid pay lines 114, or the number of pay lines 114 corresponding to the number of bets may be set as the valid pay lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b). FIG. 10(a) shows the types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including active combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-coin bet game.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes special combinations (special combination 1, special combination 2), general combinations (replay combination 1 to replay combination 13, small combination 1 to small combination 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination 1 to replay combination 13 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands." Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role 1 to a replay role 13 are included.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combination) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the 3-coin bet game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the 2-coin bet game. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 2" for special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-seven 1" for special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). .

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination 1 is internally won, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win all together. This special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special prize 1 or the special prize 2. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts (in this example, 110 for winning by BB1 and 55 for winning by BB2) are paid out, a replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) there is). The special game state (RT4) and the low replay probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The “replay role (replay role 1 to replay role 13)” is a winning role (operating role) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, No medals will be paid out. In addition, the corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay" for replay role 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay role 2 (effect replay 1), and replay role 3 (Effect replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 5, such as "seven 1-seven 2-seven 1".

“Small wins (small wins 1 to 5)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. As shown in FIG. 5, the role 2 (watermelon 1) is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 should be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of predetermined reel stop control data is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process for a winning combination to be described later), and the selected reel is stopped. Based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame sliding control) is performed. The pull-in control shifts the stop positions of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (the number of symbols) after the player operates the stop buttons 137-139. refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 . Each reel stop data consists of permissive control that permits the symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed together on the winning line, and prohibition control that the symbol combination of any winning combination is not displayed together on the winning line. ,

Examples of the allowable control are, for example, when a winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (while the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed in a uniform manner within the range of the number of frames, even if it is bad. However, since it is only "accepted", there are cases where the symbol combination is not complete depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137-139.

For example, when the small win 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon pattern is arranged in more than 4 frames. don't stop at

Of course, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, there are cases where the symbols are aligned 100%. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, the player wins 100% regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example of prohibition control is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the internal winning of the special role is not in progress (flag carried over), and the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139 by the player. At best, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Types of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6A is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state and a special prize 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state and a special prize 2 internal winning state. It has a state (RT3) and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, these four game states are referred to as RT-based game states. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT-based game state), and according to the AT-based game state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control section 400 is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 6(b).

In addition, the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operating the condition device related to the replay combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device relating to the replay combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 7(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used for the internal lottery process for the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT type game state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of a winning combination in each gaming state, which will be explained later, is obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, and the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination is obtained at the time of the internal lottery. It is obtained by a value divided by numerical data within a numerical range (for example, 65535). For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value for the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability for the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536×100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss.

A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination is determined. Setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared for this lottery data with different winning probabilities of at least one combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. It should be noted that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and the probability is not limited to this.

Hereinafter, the RT system game state of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state) in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also In the replay low-probability state, a winning combination for internal winning is selected by referring to the lottery table in the row of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7(a).

Winning hands that are internally won in the replay low probability state include special hand 1 (condition device No. 1, only 3 bet games), special hand 2 (not shown, only 2 bet games), replay hand 1 ( Condition device No. 2), replay hands 2, 4 to 10 (condition device No. 3), replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13 (condition device No. 4), small hand 1 to small There is a role 5 (condition device No. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that the player did not win the winning role is expressed as "won the wrong way".

Here, "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" are replay hands 2, replay hands 4, replay hands 5, replay hands 6, replay hands 7, replay hands 8, replay hands 9 , and replay combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 5, replay combination 6, replay combination 7, replay combination according to the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112 8, a symbol combination corresponding to either a replay combination 9 or a replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. It should be noted that, like this "replayed combination 2, 4 to 10", there is a case where the combination in which the winning combination is determined by the order of operations is called a "push order combination".

Further, "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are replay hands 3, replay hands 4, replay hands 6, replay hands 8, replay hands 10, replay hands 11 , replay combination 12, and replay combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 6, replay combination 8, replay combination 10, replay combination according to the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112 11, a replay combination 12, and a replay combination 13 are displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line in accordance with the operation order of the player (FIG. 7 ( a) See remarks). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 11 medals are paid out ( bell award). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is not displayed on the winning line (losing).

In addition, "small winning combination 4" is composed of "small winning combination 4a" and "small winning combination 4b". ” is displayed on the pay line. On the other hand, if the “small win 4b” is internally won, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured as

Here, with reference to FIG. 7(b), the correct operation order of "small winning combination 4" will be described in detail. "Small role 4" is exactly six of "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". , and a different correct operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided "small wins 4". It should be noted that the range of the lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small wins 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small win 4LCR" of the "small win 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct operation, and the other stop operations are the incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" of the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 6(a) shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), which will be described later. When the special combination 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), it is indicated that the state shifts to the special combination 2 internal election state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), Special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
Special combination internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter collectively referred to as "special combination internal winning state") are replay low probability states (RT1 ), the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. By doing, it is a game state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the internal winning winning combination is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the "RT2" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), the lottery table in the row of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. Winning hands internally won in the special role internal winning state include replay hand 1, replay hands 2, 4 to 10, replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, small hand 1 to small hand 4. There is If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. In addition, in FIG. 6(a), when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed in the special role internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), a special game to be described later is performed. A transition to state (RT4) is shown.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In the special game state, the lottery table in the row of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The winning combination internally won in the special game state is only the small combination 5. - 特許庁Also, if the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

FIG. 6(a) shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the prescribed number of coins is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. transition to In addition, when the state is shifted to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. .

In the present embodiment, the special game state ends when the specified number of payouts is executed. For example, the game may end when a prize is won eight times, or when a predetermined number of games (for example, six times) are played. That is, condition (D) shown in FIG. 6A is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIG. 6(b). FIG. 6B is a transition diagram of the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 .

The game state of the AT system is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state, as shown in FIG. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and is also called an AT mode. Here, the operation navigator means that an internal winning combination (in this example, replay combination 2, 4 to 10, replay combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, or a small combination 4) is won. In this case, it refers to an effect that informs the correct operation order. That is, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the content of a stop operation for obtaining medals, or the content of a stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state or maintaining an advantageous game state.

Operation navigation will now be described with reference to FIGS. 7(b) and 8. FIG. In this embodiment, the payout number display 127 and effect image display device 157 are used to execute operation navigation. FIG. 7(b) is a diagram for explaining the order of correct operation for the pushing order of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention, and FIG. It is a diagram.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel, and the display data 03 is , and data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel.

Therefore, when "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" or "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number indicator 127 displays a lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03, and an effect image is displayed. Device 157 displays an image (eg, the characters “--1”) that suggests that the first stopping reel is right reel 112 .

The display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 as the third stop reel, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111. Display data 06 is the first stop reel, the middle reel 111, and the second stop reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 and the third stop reel as the right reel 112, and the display data 07 are the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the reel 110, the display data 08 is data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. , the display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the left reel 110 as the third stop reel.

Therefore, when the small win 4CLR of the "small win 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected. and the effect image display device 157 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image (for example, the characters “213”) is displayed.

In this embodiment, based on the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is a replay combination or a small combination of 4. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer for the small winning combination 4 may be three choices like the replay winning combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be notified using the display data 01-03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. In addition, it is also possible to configure the stop operation of the correct answer for the replay combination to be six options such as the small combination 4, and to notify the replay combination using the display data 04 to 09 as well. Also in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 6(c), for example, transitions are made in the order of fixed notification state→AT1 state→judging state, and from this judging state, the game shifts to normal game state or AT2 state via pullback state. There is a route, and a route that directly transitions from the judge state to the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (eg, 50 games) of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as AT game number) is provided. Further, although details will be described later, if a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the vehicle shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 6(b) is a diagram showing the effect state in each game state of the AT system. Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed as shown in FIG. 6(b), which is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the final announcement state, the judge state, the withdrawal state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of paid balls increases.

Here, the limit state is, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (This case will be described later). In this embodiment, when the high-navigation state becomes 20 or less games remaining, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") suggesting the end of the high-navigation state is executed.

<Production table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control section 400 will be described with reference to FIG.
@
@
FIG. 9(a) shows an image of an effect table provided in the first sub-controller 400. FIG. The storage means (for example, the ROM 406 and the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 3) of the first sub-control section 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

The first sub-control unit 400, in the command processing (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main processing to be described later, effect information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, effect state, high navigation state counter, Production state counter, etc.) is acquired, and in the subsequent production control process (step S3605), the production table corresponding to the production state, etc. is referred to, and production corresponding to the production state counter, etc. is performed. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the later-described AT1 effect from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the later-described judge effect from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 9(b) is a diagram showing an example of the judgment state rendering table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the judge state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to, for example, a judge state effect table as shown in FIG. Judge performances corresponding to points and performance state counters are performed.

Specifically, when the performance control is performed according to the judgment state performance table shown in FIG. <B) is performed, and when the point is 2, the judgment effect is performed to change the enemy character in the order of A->A->B->B. In addition, when the effect control is performed according to the judgment state effect table shown in FIG. -1→D2-1→D3-1→… Performs a judgment effect that changes in turn, and when the value of the effect state counter is N-1 (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N-1), the effect mode is changed. Judge performance is performed to change in the order of D1-2→D2-2→D3-2→ . . .

Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, the effect table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 9(c) is a diagram showing an example of the LMT state rendering table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the corresponding opportunity (starting condition, end condition, etc. of the performance) has arrived, and when the opportunity has arrived, the performance corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when effect control is performed according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIG. When the pressing operation (lever on) is received, from among multiple types of effects A1 to A3 using the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 9 (c) (2), depending on the current setting value to select a predetermined effect, perform processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, and execute setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image).

Also, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is received, the lottery table for setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. Select a predetermined effect from among a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10 according to the current set value, perform processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, etc., and perform setting suggestion effect B (for example, the background image of the end screen).

Further, although the details will be described later, in the case of a two-coin bet game, in the case of controlling to continuously display a specific scene (not to display the subsequent scene) in the interlocking effect, the main control unit 300 is in the effect state. Since the counter value is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the scene corresponding to the same rendering state counter value. It should be noted that the method of controlling to continuously display a specific scene (not to display subsequent scenes) in the interlocked effect is not limited to this example. It may be configured not to transmit the command for displaying the subsequent scene in the presentation.

It should be noted that the effect mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example. For example, as shown in FIG. , the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger than when it is small.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Based on the above characteristics, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, bet number setting/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that the medals have been inserted. When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generating circuit 316 is obtained, and internal winning combination lottery processing is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and the result of this internal lottery is displayed. Prepare to send the internal lottery command to the first sub-controller 400 . As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command containing information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S106, based on the start lever operation, the effect state control processing A relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S107, the process for production|presentation is performed. In this effect processing, control of various effects and the like are performed.

In step S108, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop table. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S110, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S111, medal awarding processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player wins some winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

At step S113, an effect state control process B relating to control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S114, a high-navigation state ending process for ending the high-navigation state is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission processing (step S2006 in FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S2003, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>2006 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S2007, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion and medal payout abnormalities is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S2009, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and if the low voltage signal is off (power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 when power is restored, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 10 is returned to.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 12(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 12(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. FIG. In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the driving circuit 424. FIG. In step S3009, information output processing is performed to set the transmission of a command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S3005, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S3101 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 12A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S3202, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4005, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S4004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S4005, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 13A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S4202, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S4303; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size, and so on) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 534 . The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S5306. wait for is entered.

In step S4306, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Operation means>
Next, operation means provided in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured with a plurality of operating means including a first operating means, a second operating means, and the like.

Here, the operation means means a means capable of performing a certain operation, and the operation means is provided at a position where the player can operate, at least the operation means which can be operated by the player, or the operation means which can be operated by the player. is provided at a position inoperable, and includes at least an operation means that can be operated by a store clerk.

The operation means that can be operated by the player includes, for example, the start lever 135, stop buttons 137 to 139, bet button 130, bet button 131, production button (bet button) 132, and medal return button, which have been described with reference to FIG. 133, a checkout button 134, direction keys (up direction key, down direction key, right direction key, left direction key), enter key, chance button, touch panel, and the like.

The operating means that can be operated by the store clerk includes, for example, the power switch 244 that can be operated by opening the front door 102 described with reference to FIG. Examples include a setting key that can be started, and a setting switch that can be used to change or confirm settings.

Note that the operation means may be configured by a plurality of operation units (for example, four up, down, left, and right direction keys and one enter key). In this case, all of the plurality of operation units (for example, four All four direction keys and one decision key) may be defined as one operation means, or at least one of a plurality of operation units (for example, four direction keys of up, down, left, right and one decision key) at least one of them) may be defined as operation means.

<Cancellation of production by betting operation>
Next, the cancellation of the effect by the bet operation will be explained.

FIG. 14(A) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, changes in image display and sound mode when the player selects BGM sound using the operation means during AT game. 14(B)(0) to (6) are diagrams showing an example of image display displayed during each period indicated by reference numerals (0) to (6) in FIG. 14(A). is.

In this example, the player uses the operation means during the AT game to select the BGM sound during the AT game, but the game state is not limited to the AT game, and may be a bonus game or the like. In addition, items that can be selected by the player are not limited to the type of sound, and include, for example, the type of image displayed using the liquid crystal display device 157 (for example, background image, character image, etc.), the type of privilege or item, and so on. , the type of production, the type of production means, and the like. Also, the sound that the player can select is not limited to the BGM sound, and may be an effect sound or the like.

In this example, since the game state is AT game, as shown in FIG. In front of this background image during AT, a number display (in this example, a character display of "total 260 medals") indicating the total number of medals acquired during the AT game is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this example has a BGM selectable state (first state) in which the player can select BGM sounds, and a BGM unselectable state (second state) in which the player cannot select BGM sounds. state).

In the BGM selectable state (first state), it is possible to accept operations of direction keys (not shown) (up direction key, down direction key) and bet button 132 (first operation means).

When the upward key is operated during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM sounds output from the speaker are switched in the order of, for example, BGM1→BGM2→BGM3→BGM1→ . . . can be freely selected. It should be noted that even if the operation of the up arrow key is not accepted, after a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM sound is automatically played (operation It may be configured to switch without depending on the operation of the means.

When the downward key is operated during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM sounds output from the speaker are switched in the order of BGM1→BGM3→BGM2→BGM1→ . It is possible to select to It should be noted that even if the operation of the down arrow key is not accepted, after a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM sound is automatically It may be configured to switch without depending on the operation of the means.

Further, when the bet button 132 (first operation means) is operated during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM selectable state (first state) changes to the BGM unselectable state (second state). Second state) is executed (first control), and the BGM sound selected in the BGM selectable state (first state) is set (stored) as the BGM sound selected by the user.

It should be noted that even if the previous game is a replay (even if no bet operation is required in the game), the bet button 132 (first operation means) is pressed during the BGM selectable state (first state). It may be configured such that when operated, control (first control) is executed to shift from the BGM selectable state (first state) to the BGM unselectable state (second state).

On the other hand, in the BGM selectable state (second state), it is possible to accept the operation of the checkout button 134 (second operating means), but the direction keys (up key, down key), bet button 132 ( The operation of the first operation means) is invalid and cannot be accepted. Therefore, in the BGM unselectable state (second state), the player cannot freely select and switch the BGM sound.

When the settlement button 134 (second operation means) is operated during the period of the BGM unselectable state (second state), the BGM unselectable state (second state) is changed to the BGM selectable state (first state). state) is executed (second control).

The BGM selectable state (first state) and the BGM unselectable state (second state) will be specifically described below.

<BGM selectable state (first state)>
The state shown in FIGS. 14A (0) and 14B (0) is a BGM selectable state (first state), in which the BGM1 sound is set as the initial setting of the BGM sound. is.

In this example, since the BGM1 sound is set as the initial setting of the BGM sound, a BGM1 image (in this example, "BGM1") indicating that the BGM sound is the BGM1 sound is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. (image including a character string) is displayed, and BGM1 sound is output at volume A from the speaker.

Since this state is the BGM selectable state (first state), BGM selectable images (in this example, an upward arrow and downward arrow).

14(A)(1) and 14(B)(1) are BGM selectable states (first state), in which the BGM sound is switched from the BGM1 sound to the BGM2 sound. be.

In this example, during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the upward key is operated at the timing shown in FIG. , a BGM2 image (in this example, an image including the character string "BGM2") indicating that the BGM sound is the BGM2 sound is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the volume BGM2 sound is output at A.

It should be noted that even if no operation of the upward key or the downward key is accepted, the BGM sound will be output after a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state). It may be configured to switch automatically (without depending on the operation of the operation means) (the same shall apply hereinafter).

Since this state is a BGM selectable state (first state), a BGM selectable image (in this example, an upward arrow and downward arrow).

Also, in this example, during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the bet button 132 (first operation means) was operated at the timing shown in FIGS. Control (first control) for transitioning from a BGM selectable state (first state) to a BGM unselectable state (second state) is executed, and selected in the BGM selectable state (first state) The BGM2 sound is set (stored) as the BGM sound selected by the user.

As shown in FIG. 14(B)(2'), when the bet button 132 (first operating means) is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. A cut-in image (in this example, an image containing the character string "Super heat!") suggesting the addition of a bet button may be displayed at the timing of FIGS. The cut-in image may not be displayed even if 132 (first operation means) is operated.

<BGM unselectable state (second state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 14(A)(2) and (B)(2) are BGM unselectable states (second states).

In this example, since the BGM sound is set to the BGM2 sound in the previous BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM2 sound indicating that the BGM sound is the BGM2 sound is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 . An image (in this example, an image including a character string of "BGM2") is displayed, and BGM2 sound is output at volume A from the speaker.

Since this state is the BGM unselectable state (second state), BGM selectable images (an upward arrow and a downward arrow) is not displayed.

14(A)(3) and 14(B)(3), the timing shown in FIG. , the direction key (the up key or the down key) has been operated.

Since this state is a state in which BGM cannot be selected (second state), operations of the direction keys (up key, down key) and bet button 132 (first operation means) are invalid and accepted. Therefore, even if the direction key is operated, the BGM sound is not switched, and the player cannot switch the BGM sound.

Further, in this example, during the period of the BGM selectable state (second state), the payment button 134 (second operation means) was operated at the timing shown in FIGS. Control (second control) for transitioning from the BGM selectable state (second state) to the BGM selectable state (first state) is executed, and control related to settlement (payout of bet credits, payment of remaining credits) is executed.

According to this example, when the player unintentionally operates the bet button 132 (first operating means), the BGM can be selected by operating the checkout button 134 (second operating means). In addition to returning to the state (first state), control (fourth control) regarding payment can also be executed.

<BGM selectable state (first state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 14(A)(4) and 14(B)(4) are the BGM selectable state (first state), and the BGM2 sound is set as the BGM sound.

In this example, since the BGM2 sound is set as the BGM sound in the previous BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM2 sound indicating that the BGM sound is the BGM2 sound is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. An image (in this example, an image including the character string "BGM2") is displayed, and BGM2 sound is output from the speaker at a volume B that is higher than the volume A.

In this example, when a predetermined time (40 seconds in this example) has passed after the third stop of the previous game, the sound output from the speaker is changed from volume A to volume B (>volume A), and the volume However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the volume may not be changed or may be decreased.

Since this state is a BGM selectable state (first state), a BGM selectable image (in this example, an upward arrow and downward arrow).

14(A)(5) and (B)(5) of FIG. 14 are BGM selectable states (first state), in which the BGM sound is switched from BGM2 sound to BGM3 sound. be.

In this example, during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the upward key is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. , a BGM3 image (in this example, an image including the character string "BGM3") indicating that the BGM sound is BGM3 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. 3 BGM sounds are output at a volume A smaller than B.

In this example, since the BGM sound is switched, the volume is changed from volume B to volume A (<volume B) to reduce the volume. , the volume may not be changed, or the volume may be set to the initial set value.

Since this state is the BGM selectable state (first state), BGM selectable images (in this example, an upward arrow and downward arrow).

Also, in this example, during the period of the BGM selectable state (first state), the bet button 132 (first operation means) was operated at the timing shown in FIGS. Control (first control) for transitioning from a BGM selectable state (first state) to a BGM unselectable state (second state) is executed, and selected in the BGM selectable state (first state) The BGM3 sound is set (stored) as the BGM sound selected by the user.

<BGM unselectable state (second state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 14(A)(6) and (B)(6) are the BGM unselectable state (second state).

In this example, since the BGM sound is set to the BGM3 sound in the previous BGM selectable state (first state), the BGM3 sound indicating that the BGM sound is the BGM3 sound is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 . An image (in this example, an image including a character string of "BGM3") is displayed, and BGM3 sound is output at volume A from the speaker.

In addition, since this state is the BGM unselectable state (second state), BGM selectable images (an upward arrow and a downward arrow) is not displayed.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) has first operation means (for example, the bet button 132 shown in FIG. 1) and second operation means. means (e.g., checkout button 134 shown in FIG. 1), and control means (e.g., main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) capable of transitioning to one of a plurality of states. a gaming machine, wherein one of the plurality of states is a first state in which an operation of the first operating means can be accepted (for example, a BGM selectable state shown in FIG. 14); One state of the plurality of states is a second state in which an operation of the second operating means can be accepted (for example, a BGM selectable state shown in FIG. 14), and a period of the first state When the first operation means is operated during the period, the first control can be executed, and when the second operation means is operated during the period of the second state, the second control is executed It is executable, and when the second operation means is operated during the period of the second state, fourth control (for example, control related to settlement (payout of bet credits, payout of remaining credits, etc.) ) may be executed, and the first control determines a specific option from among a plurality of options (e.g., BGM) to shift the first state to the second state (e.g., control), and the second control is a control that shifts the second state to the first state (for example, cancels a specific option determined from among a plurality of options (for example, BGM) control), and the fourth control is a control different from the second control.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the player unintentionally operates the first operating means, the second operating means is operated to return to the first state. , a fourth control can also be performed.

Further, when the first operation means is operated during the period of the first state, a third control (for example, control related to medal betting) may be executed, and the third control is , the control may be different from the first control.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the third control together with the first control by operating the first operating means, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

Moreover, when the fourth control is executed, the execution result of the third control may be canceled.

With such a configuration, the execution of the third control not intended by the player can be canceled by the player himself, and convenience for the player can be enhanced.

Further, a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a selection effect display is provided, and the first state can change options (for example, BGM sound) in the selection effect display. and the second state may be a state in which it is impossible to change options in the selection effect display.

With such a configuration, when the selection is fixed by a certain option not intended by the player, the player himself/herself can cancel and select the option again, which is convenient for the player. can increase

Further, a third operation means (for example, a direction key) is provided, and when the third operation means is operated during the period of the first state, the option selected in the selection effect display changes to another option. The option selected in the selection effect display may not be changed to another option when the third operation means is operated during the period of the second state after being changed to the option.

With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the option can be changed by operating the third operating means.

Further, when a certain period of time elapses during the period of the first state, the option selected in the selection effect display is changed to another option, and a certain period of time elapses during the period of the second state. Then, the option selected in the selection effect display may not be changed to another option.

With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the option can be changed with the lapse of time.

<Demonstration display, game information display>
Next, demonstration display and game information display will be described. FIG. 15A is a diagram showing an example of the demonstration display, and FIG. 15B is a diagram showing an example of the game information display.

The demo display is a display that is displayed during non-playing. In this example, a character image of a certain character (Yoshimune) and a game information icon (in this example, " An image containing a character string of "game information"), etc.

The demonstration display is not limited to this example. For example, a special moving image may be displayed, an advertisement display regarding the amusement arcade (announcement of an event or installation of a new machine, etc.) may be performed, or a game machine may be displayed. You may display advertisements (announcement of new products, etc.) regarding

The game information display is a display that is displayed while the game is not being played, and is a display that displays information related to the game. In this example, a payout table icon (this example , an image including the character string "payout table"), a display of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination and the number of payouts, and an operation image indicating that it is possible to move pages and end the display of game information. be.

The game information display is not limited to this example, and for example, the game method (tutorial) of the game machine, the type of game state, explanation of the contents, etc. may be displayed.

In this example, when the bet button 132 (first operating means) is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demo display can be shifted to the normal background display. When the (second operation means) is operated, it is possible to shift from the demonstration display to the game information display. Further, when the chance button (second operation means) is operated while the game information display is being displayed, it is possible to shift from the game information display to the demonstration display.

A specific example of the transition between the demonstration display and the game information display will be described below.

<Normal background display → Demo display>
First, an example of transition from normal background display to demonstration display will be described.

FIG. 16A is a diagram showing an example of transition from normal background display to demonstration display.

In this example, in a certain game, while the normal background display is being displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the third stop operation is performed at the timing shown in FIG. After that, at the timing shown in (A) (2) of the same figure, since the second time (40 seconds in this example) has passed since the third stop operation, the normal background display is changed to the demonstration display, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. A demo display has started to be displayed in the display area of device 157 .

Further, in this example, after the display of the demonstration display is started, the first time (300 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the demonstration display at the timing shown in (A) (3) of FIG. , while continuing the demonstration display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the volume of the sound (for example, BGM sound) output from the speaker is changed from the player setting volume to the game parlor setting volume.

Here, the player-set volume is the volume set by the player on the volume setting screen or the like, and the amusement store-set volume is the volume set by the store clerk or the like on the volume setting screen or the like. be.

<Demonstration display → Game information display → Demo display>
Next, a description will be given of an example in which the demo display is shifted to the game information display, and then the demo display is started again.

FIG. 16(B) is a diagram showing an example of shifting from the demonstration display to the game information display and then shifting to the demonstration display again. The states shown in FIGS. 16(B)(1) to 16(B)(2) are the same states as FIGS. 16(A)(1) to 16(A)(2). are omitted.

In this example, since the chance button (second operating means) is operated at the timing shown in (B)(3) of FIG. there is

Further, in this example, since the chance button (second operation means) was operated at the timing shown in (4) of FIG. Moved to demo display.

According to this example, when the chance button (second operation means) is operated after the game information display is checked during the demonstration display, the display of the game information can be shifted to the demo display again. A player who wants to enjoy the demonstration display again after confirming , can restart the demonstration display by his/her own operation, and the satisfaction and freedom of the player can be increased.

Further, in this example, after restarting the display of the demonstration display, the first time (300 seconds in this example) has passed since the restart of the demonstration display at the timing shown in (B) (5) of FIG. , while continuing the demonstration display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the volume of the sound (for example, BGM sound) output from the speaker is changed from the player setting volume to the game parlor setting volume.

According to this example, when the player intends to continue playing the game but wants to temporarily leave the seat to go to the toilet or eat, the player can change the demo display to the game information display by his/her own operation. The setting can be left as is the volume setting by the player.

<Demonstration display → Normal background display → Demo display>
Next, a description will be given of an example of transitioning from the demonstration display to the normal background display and then transitioning to the demonstration display again.

FIG. 17A is a diagram showing an example of transition from demonstration display to normal background display and then transition to demonstration display again. The states shown in FIGS. 17B(1) to 17B(2) are the same states as FIGS. 16A(1) to 16(A)(2). are omitted.

In this example, since the bet button 132 (first operating means) is operated at the timing shown in (A)(3) of FIG. ing.

Further, in this example, after starting the display of the normal background display, the second time (40 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the normal background display at the timing shown in (A)(4) in FIG. Therefore, the normal background display is changed to the demonstration display again.

Further, in this example, after restarting the display of the demonstration display, at the timing shown in FIG. , while continuing the demonstration display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the volume of the sound (for example, BGM sound) output from the speaker is changed from the player setting volume to the game parlor setting volume.

According to this example, if the bet button 132 (first operation means) is operated during the display of the demo display, it is possible to shift to the normal background display. The demo display can be interrupted and the game can be started by the player's own operation, and the satisfaction and freedom of the player can be enhanced.

<Demonstration display → Game information display → Normal background display → Demo display>
Next, an example will be described in which the demo display shifts to the game information display, and then shifts to the normal background display, and then shifts to the demo display again.

FIG. 17B is a diagram showing an example in which the demo display shifts to the game information display, then shifts to the normal background display, and then shifts to the demo display again. The states shown in FIGS. 17B(1) to 17B(3) are the same states as FIGS. 16B(1) to 16B(3). are omitted.

In this example, since the bet button 132 (first operating means) is operated at the timing shown in (B)(4) of FIG. are migrating.

Further, in this example, after the normal background display is started, the second time (40 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the normal background display at the timing shown in (B)(5) in FIG. Therefore, the normal background display is changed to the demonstration display again.

Further, in this example, after restarting the display of the demonstration display, the first time (300 seconds in this example) has passed since the restart of the demonstration display at the timing shown in (B) (5) of FIG. , while continuing the demonstration display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the volume of the sound (for example, BGM sound) output from the speaker is changed from the player setting volume to the game parlor setting volume.

According to this example, when the bet button 132 (first operation means) is operated after confirming the game information display while the demo display is being displayed, it is possible to shift to the normal background display. A player who wants to start the game as soon as possible after confirming the display can start the game by his/her own operation, and the satisfaction and freedom of the player can be enhanced.

<Demonstration display → Game information display → Setting confirmation display → Demo display>
Next, an example will be described in which the demo display shifts to the game information display, and then shifts to the setting confirmation display, and then shifts to the demonstration display again.

FIG. 18(A) is a diagram showing an example in which the demo display shifts to the game information display, further shifts to the setting confirmation display, and then shifts to the demonstration display again. 18(A)(1) to FIG. 18(A)(3) are the same states as FIG. 16(B)(1) to FIG. 16(B)(3). are omitted.

The gaming machine according to this example includes a third operation means (in this example, a setting key that can start an operation for changing or confirming settings) arranged at a position where a player cannot operate. .

In this example, during the display of game information, at the timing shown in (A)(4) in the same figure, the first clerk operation (in this example, after opening the front door 102, the setting key (third operation means) is inserted into a predetermined insertion hole and rotated 90 degrees in the positive direction), the game information display is shifted to a setting confirmation display that allows confirmation of set values.

Further, in this example, while the setting confirmation display is being displayed, the second clerk operation (in this example, the setting key (third operation means) is rotated 90 degrees in the opposite direction and removed from the insertion hole, and then the front face is Since the operation of closing the door 102) has been performed, the setting confirmation display is changed to the demonstration display.

According to this example, since the display of the gaming machine can be changed to the demo display after the setting confirmation, the setting confirmation work of the gaming machine can be performed until just before the opening of the amusement arcade, and the convenience of the amusement arcade clerk or the like can be improved. can.

When the first clerk operation is performed, the setting confirmation display is started and the display of the door opening display for informing the opening of the front door 102 is started, and when the second clerk operation is performed , the door opening display may be erased at the start of the demonstration display.

<Modified example of transition to demo display>
Next, a modified example of transition to demonstration display will be described. FIG. 18(B) is a diagram showing an example of shifting to the demonstration display again with the operation of the settlement button 134 (settlement operation) as a trigger.

In this example, since the chance button (second operation means) is operated at the timing shown in (B) (1) of FIG. there is

Further, in this example, since the settlement button 134 was operated at the timing shown in (B)(2) of FIG. Payout of credits) is executed, and the game information display is shifted to the demonstration display again.

Also, in this example, while the demo display is being displayed, the chance button (second operation means) is operated at the timing shown in FIG. Continuing demo display.

According to this example, if the settlement button 134 is operated after confirming the game information display while the demo display is being displayed, it is possible to shift to the demo display again. A player who wants to enjoy the game again can restart the demonstration display by his/her own operation, and the satisfaction and freedom of the player can be increased. In addition, the operation of the settlement button 134 also initiates control related to settlement (payout of credits placed on the bet and payout of remaining credits), so convenience for the player can be enhanced.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) has first operation means (for example, the bet button 132 shown in FIG. 1) and second operation means. A gaming machine comprising means (for example, a chance button) and display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a demonstration display (for example, the demonstration display shown in FIG. 15A). When the first operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display can be shifted to the normal background display, and the second operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed. Then, the demo display can be shifted to the game information display (for example, the game information display shown in FIG. 15B). The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to switch from the game information display to the demonstration display.

With conventional amusement machines, if there is any operation while the demo display is being displayed, it will switch to the normal background display. In order to enjoy the demonstration display again, it was necessary to wait for a predetermined time until the demonstration display was restarted. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the second operation means is operated after confirming the game information display during the display of the demonstration display, it is possible to shift to the demonstration display again. A player who wants to enjoy the demonstration display again after confirming the game information display can restart the demonstration display by his/her own operation, and the satisfaction and freedom of the player can be increased.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine and pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) has first operation means (for example, the bet button 132 shown in FIG. 1) and second operation means (for example, a chance button) and display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a demonstration display (for example, the demonstration display shown in FIG. 15A), wherein the demonstration When the first operation means is operated during the display of the display, the demo display can be shifted to the normal background display, and when the second operation means is operated during the display of the demonstration display, the It is possible to shift from the demo display to the game information display (for example, the game information display shown in FIG. 15B), and when the second operating means is operated during the display of the game information display, the game information display to the demo display, and when the first operation means is operated during display of the game information display, the game information display can be shifted to the normal background display. It's a playground.

With conventional amusement machines, if there is any operation while the demo display is being displayed, it will switch to the normal background display. In order to enjoy the demonstration display again, it was necessary to wait for a predetermined time until the demonstration display was restarted. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the second operation means is operated after confirming the game information display during the display of the demonstration display, it is possible to shift to the demonstration display again. A player who wants to enjoy the demonstration display again after confirming the game information display can restart the demonstration display by his/her own operation, and the satisfaction and freedom of the player can be increased.

In addition, if the first operation means is operated after confirming the game information display during the demonstration display, it is possible to shift to the normal background display, so the game can be started as soon as possible after confirming the game information display. A player who wants to play the game can start the game by his/her own operation, and the satisfaction and freedom of the player can be further enhanced.

Further, a sound output means (for example, a speaker) is provided, and when a certain time (for example, 300 seconds) elapses after the display of the demonstration display is started, the volume setting of the sound output means is changed to the volume setting by the game arcade. It may be changed.

With such a configuration, when the player intends to continue playing the game but wants to temporarily leave the seat to use the restroom or eat, the demo display can be shifted to the game information display by the player's own operation. , the volume setting can be maintained as it is set by the player.

Further, while the game information display is being displayed, the volume setting of the sound output means may not be changed to the volume setting by the game parlor.

With such a configuration, when the player intends to continue playing the game but wants to temporarily leave the seat to use the restroom or eat, the demo display can be shifted to the game information display by the player's own operation. , the volume setting can be maintained as it is set by the player.

Further, a third operating means (for example, a setting key) is arranged at a position where the player cannot operate, and when the third operating means is operated while the game information display is being displayed, the third operating means is operated. It is possible to shift from the game information display to the setting confirmation display, and when the third operation means is operated again during the display of the setting confirmation display, even if it is possible to shift from the setting confirmation display to the demonstration display. good.

With such a configuration, the display of the gaming machine can be changed to the demonstration display after the setting confirmation, so that the setting confirmation work of the gaming machine can be performed until just before the opening of the amusement arcade, thereby enhancing the convenience of the amusement arcade clerk. be able to.

<Interlocking performance and non-interlocking output>
Next, an interlocking production and a non-interlocking production will be described.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured to have a plurality of effect means including first effect means, second effect means and the like.

Here, the production means means means capable of producing a certain production, and the production means includes display means capable of displaying images, sound output means capable of outputting sound, and light outputting means. It includes light emitting means (light output means), movable means capable of a certain action (movement), and the like.

Examples of display means capable of displaying include, in addition to the liquid crystal display device 157 described with reference to FIG. A display device composed of a projector and a screen, a touch panel, and the like are included.

Examples of sound output means capable of outputting sound include the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG. 3, as well as musical instruments (such as percussion instruments) and bells. Examples of light emitting means capable of emitting light include various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp 123, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 3, as well as LEDs. mentioned. As movable means capable of a certain action (movement), for example, in addition to the reels 110 to 112 and shutter 163 described with reference to FIG. included.

Also, each rendering means is configured to have a plurality of elements including a first element, a second element, and the like. For example, display means has elements such as display mode (display pattern), resolution, brightness (brightness), color, number of pixels, size of display area, etc. Sound output means has sound, volume, sound quality, frequency The light-emitting means has elements such as light-emitting pattern, light-emitting color, luminance (brightness), etc., and the movable means has operation patterns (opening/closing, rotation, vibration, etc.), operation speed, movable range, etc. has elements of

The gaming machine according to this example includes a lamp (first effect means, light emitting means) capable of executing a light emitting effect (first effect), and a speaker (second effect) capable of executing a sound effect (second effect). effect means, sound output means), and a liquid crystal display device 157 (third effect means, display means) capable of executing a background effect (third effect).

Light emitting effect (first effect) is a effect executed using a lamp (first effect means, light emitting means), etc. This corresponds to effects such as outputting light from a lamp according to a pattern (for example, lighting, blinking, etc.). In addition, the first effect is not limited to the effect of outputting light from the lamp. good.

A sound effect (second effect) is a effect executed using a speaker (second effect means, sound output means) or the like. (For example, the effect of outputting sound from a speaker according to the volume set by the player or the volume set by the store clerk at the amusement shop, etc.). Note that the second effect is not limited to the effect of outputting sound from a speaker. It can be.

The background effect (third effect) is a effect executed using the liquid crystal display device 157 (third effect means, display means) or the like. ), an effect of displaying a certain display (for example, background image display) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a certain color (for example, color or monochrome). Note that the third effect is not limited to the effect of displaying a background image. It may be a performance or the like.

Specific examples of the interlocking effect and the non-interlocking effect will be described below.

<Production where the light color of the lamp is not linked to the sound production>
Next, an effect in which the light emission color of the lamp is not linked to the sound effect will be described. FIG. 19A is a diagram showing an example in which the color of light emitted from a lamp does not interlock when the mode of the lighting effect by the lamp and the sound effect by the speaker, which are executed in parallel, are changed.

The light emitting effect (first effect) is a effect including at least a light emitting pattern (first element) and a light emitting color (second element). One effect) and a fourth light emitting effect (first effect of the fourth mode) can be executed.

In the first light emission effect, the lamp (first effect means, light emission means) is operated in a light emission pattern of a first pattern (for example, a light emission pattern in which the lamp blinks by repeating lighting for 5 seconds and turning off for 2 seconds). In addition, it is an effect of emitting light in a first color (for example, blue).

In the fourth light emission effect, the lamp (first effect means, light emission means) is operated in a light emission pattern of a fourth pattern (for example, a light emission pattern in which the lamp blinks by repeating lighting for 2 seconds and turning off for 1 second). In addition, it is an effect of emitting light in a first color (for example, blue).

The sound effect (second effect) is a effect that includes at least sound and volume as elements, and in this example, the second sound effect (second effect of the second aspect) and the fifth sound effect The second production of the five aspects) can be executed.

In the second sound effect, the first pattern sound (BGM1 sound in this example) is output from the speaker (second effect means, sound output means) at the player-set volume (the volume set by the player). It is a production that makes The fifth sound effect is a effect of outputting the sound of the fourth pattern (BGM2 sound in this example) from the speaker (second effect means, sound output means) at the player's set volume.

The background effect (third effect) is a effect including at least display patterns and colors as elements, and in this example, the third background effect can be executed.

The third background effect is to display a display pattern (background image display in this example) in the first color (for example, color) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (third effect means, display means). It is a performance.

As shown in FIG. 19(A), in this example, the first light effect (the first effect of the first mode) and the second sound effect (the second effect of the second mode) are performed in parallel. is being executed, when the first condition is established (in this example, when a music selection operation is accepted by a certain operation means), the first pattern sound (BGM1 sound) is played from the speaker. A second sound effect (second effect of the second aspect) to output at the player-set volume is a fifth sound effect (second effect of the second mode) to output the fourth pattern sound (BGM2 sound) from the speaker at the player-set volume. The second production of the five aspects) can be changed,
Further, when the first condition is satisfied (in this example, when a music selection operation is accepted by a certain operation means), the lamp is operated in the first light emission pattern and the first color (blue ), the first light emission effect (the first effect of the first aspect) causes the lamp to operate in the light emission pattern of the fourth pattern and emit light in the first color (blue). It is possible to change to the production (the first production of the fourth aspect).

Here, the light emission pattern (first element) in the fourth light effect (first effect of the fourth aspect), that is, the light emission pattern of the fourth pattern is the fifth sound effect (fifth aspect It is an element that synchronizes with the second production of In other words, when the fifth sound effect for outputting the sound of the fourth pattern from the speaker is started by the establishment of the first condition, the light emission pattern in the light effect also changes to the fourth sound effect of the fifth sound effect. It becomes the fourth pattern in conjunction with the sound of the pattern.

In addition, the light emission pattern (first element) in the fourth light emission effect (first effect of the fourth aspect) may be a light emission pattern in which the sound of the fourth pattern and the timing of change are linked. The aspect of the pattern is not particularly limited.

On the other hand, the light emission color (second element) in the fourth light effect (first effect of the fourth aspect), that is, the first color (blue) is the fifth sound effect (first effect of the fifth aspect) It is an element that does not synchronize with the second production). In other words, when the fifth sound effect for outputting the sound of the fourth pattern from the speaker is started due to the establishment of the first condition, the emission color in the light effect is the fourth sound effect of the fifth sound effect. It stays in the first color regardless of the pattern sound.

<Production in which the light emission color of the lamp is linked to the background production>
Next, an effect in which the light emission color of the lamp is linked with the background effect will be described. FIG. 19B is a diagram showing an example in which the light emission color of the lamp is linked to the background effect when the mode of the light emission effect by the lamp and the background effect by the liquid crystal display device 157, which are executed in parallel, changes. be.

The light emitting effect (first effect) is a effect including at least a light emitting pattern (first element) and a light emitting color (second element). 1 effect) and a seventh light emitting effect (first effect of the seventh mode) can be executed.

In the first light emission effect, the lamp (first effect means, light emission means) is operated in a light emission pattern of a first pattern (for example, a light emission pattern in which the lamp blinks by repeating lighting for 5 seconds and turning off for 2 seconds). In addition, it is an effect of emitting light in a first color (for example, blue).

In the seventh light emission effect, the lamp (first effect means, light emission means) is operated in a light emission pattern of a fourth pattern (for example, a light emission pattern in which the lamp blinks by repeating lighting for 2 seconds and turning off for 1 second). Together with this, it is a production that emits light in a seventh color (for example, green).

The sound effect (second effect) is a effect including at least sound and volume as elements, and in this example, the second sound effect (second effect of the second mode) can be executed.

In the second sound effect, the first pattern sound (BGM1 sound in this example) is output from the speaker (second effect means, sound output means) at the player-set volume (the volume set by the player). It is a production that makes

The background effect (third effect) is a effect including at least a display pattern and a color as elements, and in this example, the third background effect and the sixth background effect can be executed.

The third background effect is to display a display pattern (background image display in this example) in the first color (for example, color) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (third effect means, display means). The sixth background effect is a display pattern (background image display in this example) in a seventh color (for example, monochrome) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (third effect means, display means). ) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19B, in this example, the first light emitting effect (first effect of the first mode) and the third background effect (third effect of the third mode) are parallel. In the state of being executed, when the second condition is satisfied (in this example, when the operation by the start lever 135 is accepted), the background image display of the first color (color) is displayed. The background effect (third effect of the third aspect) can be changed to a sixth background effect (third effect of the sixth aspect) of displaying a background image display of a seventh color (monochrome). .

Further, when the second condition is satisfied (in this example, when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the lamp is operated in the light emission pattern of the first pattern and emits light in the first color (blue). The first light emitting effect (first effect of the first aspect) to cause the lamp to operate in the light emitting pattern of the fourth pattern and emit light in the seventh color (green). The first production of the seven aspects) can be changed.

Here, the light emission pattern (first element) in the seventh light emission effect (first effect of the seventh aspect), that is, the light emission pattern of the fourth pattern is the sixth background effect (sixth aspect is an element that is not synchronized with the third rendition of In other words, when the sixth background effect of displaying the background image display of the seventh color (monochrome) is started due to the establishment of the second condition, the light emission pattern in the light emission effect is the same as that of the sixth background effect. It changes from the first pattern to the fourth pattern without interlocking.

On the other hand, the light emission color (second element) in the seventh light emission effect (the first effect of the seventh aspect), that is, the seventh color (green) is the background image display of the seventh color (monochrome) It is an element that synchronizes with the sixth background effect (the third effect of the sixth aspect) that displays the . In other words, when the sixth background effect of displaying the background image display of the seventh color (monochrome) is started due to the establishment of the second condition, the light emission color in the light emission effect is also the same as that of the sixth background effect. It changes from the first color (blue) to the seventh color (green) in conjunction with the color.

In addition, the light emission color (second element) in the seventh light emission effect (the first effect of the seventh aspect) is the seventh color of the sixth background effect (the third effect of the sixth aspect). The colors may be the same as or different from each other as long as the timing of change of the emitted light is synchronized with that of the color of the emitted light.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1) includes first production means (for example, lamps and LEDs) capable of executing the first production, A game machine comprising a second effect means (for example, a speaker) capable of executing a second effect, wherein the first effect is a first element (for example, a light emission pattern) and a second effect It is an effect that includes at least an element (e.g., luminescent color), and the first effect of the first aspect (e.g., the first luminescent effect shown in FIG. 19 (A)) and the second effect of the second aspect When the first condition is established in a state in which the production (for example, the second sound production shown in FIG. 19A) is executed in parallel (hereinafter referred to as "first case". For example, FIG. (A) When the music selection operation shown in (1) is received), the second effect of the second aspect is the second effect of the fifth aspect (for example, in FIG. 19 (A) In the first case, the first effect of the first aspect is changed to the first effect of the fourth aspect (for example, FIG. 19 (A) 4), the first element in the first effect of the fourth aspect is an element that synchronizes with the second effect of the fifth aspect, and the The second element (for example, the first color that is the luminescent color) in the first rendering of the fourth aspect is an element that is not synchronized with the second rendering of the fifth aspect. It is a playground to play.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when changing the performance mode of the first performance and the second performance that are executed in parallel, the first performance and the second performance are synchronized. Since there are elements that are not synchronized with the elements, compared to the production that completely synchronizes the first production and the second production, it is difficult to feel discomfort due to the gap between the productions, and the first production and the second production It is possible to enhance the performance effect of.

Further, in the first case, the effect mode of the second effect may be changed after the effect mode of the first effect is changed.

With such a configuration, there is a time lag between the time required to change the performance of the first performance means and the second performance means, but by intentionally providing a non-synchronized element, it is difficult to feel a sense of incompatibility due to the time lag between the performances. can.

Further, a third effect means capable of executing a third effect (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the first effect of the first mode (for example, shown in FIG. 19B) is provided. The second condition is established in a state in which the first light emitting effect) and the third effect of the third aspect (for example, the third background effect shown in FIG. 19B) are being executed in parallel. case (hereinafter referred to as “second case”. For example, when the operation of the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 19(B)(1) is accepted), the third effect of the third mode is It is possible to change to the third effect of six aspects (for example, the sixth background effect shown in FIG. 19 (B)), and in the second case, the first effect of the first aspect is The first effect of the seventh aspect (for example, the seventh light emitting effect shown in FIG. 19 (B)) can be changed, and the first element in the first effect of the seventh aspect is It is an element that is not synchronized with the third rendering of the sixth aspect, and the second element (for example, the seventh color that is the luminescent color) in the first rendering of the seventh aspect is the sixth It may be an element that synchronizes with the third effect of the aspect.

With such a configuration, when changing the effect mode of the first effect and the third effect that are executed in parallel, the element to be synchronized between the first effect and the third effect and the synchronization Because there is an element that does not make it, compared to the production that completely synchronizes the first production and the third production, it is difficult to feel discomfort due to the gap between the productions, and the production effect of the first production and the third production can increase

Further, in the second case, after the effect mode of the first effect is changed (for example, when the music selection operation shown in FIG. 19(A)(2) or (A)(3) is received) after a certain period of time has elapsed since the operation of the start lever 135 was accepted, as shown in (B)(2) and (B)(3) of FIG. The production mode of the third production may be changed.

With such a configuration, there is a time lag between the time required to change the performance of the first performance means and the third performance means, but by intentionally providing a non-synchronized element, it is difficult to feel a sense of incongruity due to the time lag between the performances. can do.

Further, the first rendering means is a light emitting means (for example, a lamp or an LED), and the first element in the first rendering is one of a light emitting pattern and a light emitting color of the light emitting means. , the second element in the first rendering may be the other of the light emission pattern and the light emission color.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity due to the misalignment between the light emitting means and the other effect means, and also to enhance the effect of the effect of the effect using the light emitting means.

Further, the second effect means is a sound output means (for example, a speaker), the second effect of the second aspect is an effect of outputting at least a certain BGM from the sound output means, and The second effect of the fifth aspect may be a effect of outputting at least BGM different from the certain BGM from the sound output means.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort due to the discrepancy between the sound output means and the other effect means, and to enhance the effect of the effect of the effect using the sound output means.

Further, the third rendering means is a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and the third rendering of the third mode is to display at least a certain background display on the display means. and the third effect of the sixth aspect may be an effect of displaying at least a background display different from the certain background display on the display means.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity due to the misalignment between the display means and the other effect means, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of the effect using the display means.

Further, the operation means may be provided, and the first condition may be a condition that is satisfied when an operation of the operation means (for example, a direction key that allows music selection) is accepted, or the operation means is provided, The second condition may be a condition that is satisfied when an operation of the operation means (for example, start lever 135) is received.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 20 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, generally three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five winning lines 114 . For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, three lines will be valid with the addition of the upper horizontal prize line and the lower horizontal prize line, and the medal will be awarded. When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines obtained by adding a lower right pay line and an upper right pay line may be effective as pay lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right Five lines, ie, a downward pay line and an upward pay line may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted is a "three bet game," a game in which two medals are inserted is a "two bet game," and a game in which one medal is inserted. is sometimes referred to as "one bet game".

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called " The operation sequence for the stopping operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is called the "reverse pressing operation sequence" or simply "reverse pressing". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). It is a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment functions as a effect device that executes effects (for example, panel attack effect, bonus symbol notification effect, etc.) to be described later.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the whole of the display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the controller.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A driving circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126 and the payout number indicator 127 is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 . The speakers 272 and 277 of this embodiment function as an effect device that executes an effect (for example, a bonus symbol stop effect) to be described later.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
With reference to FIG. 22(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" pattern is placed on each.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 22(b), the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are bonus combinations that shift to a bonus game, and the replay is a replay without inserting new medals. The winning combination may be called a "working combination" to be distinguished from the winning combination. included. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany the payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Bonuses and prizes for replays are included.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7)-BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" for BB1 and "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7)-BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol" for BB2. Further, the flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). The state in which the flag indicating the internal winning is set (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the bonus internal winning state) is maintained until the next game is played, and the internal winning of BB1 and BB2 is in progress even after the next game. White 7-White 7" and the symbol combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" corresponding to BB2 are in a winning state.

"Regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (operating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also called bonus)-RB symbol-RB symbol". It should be noted that flag carrying over is performed for RB in the same manner as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the start of the big bonus game is not based on the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) or the display of the symbol combination on the winning line. A regular bonus game may be started later, and the regular bonus game may be automatically started such that when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is immediately started.

The RB game of this embodiment is composed of 8 games, and the RB game ends when the 8 games of the RB game are finished.

"Small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon", and "bell") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbols The combination is "cherry pattern-ANY pattern-ANY pattern" for cherry, "watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern" for watermelon, and "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol on the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

"Replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination for the replay is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol".

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each role is obtained by combining numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role with numerical data within the range of random numbers acquired during internal lottery (65536 in this embodiment). It is obtained by the value divided by The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In practice, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one combination, and the game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. .

In this embodiment, the bonus combination is a simultaneous winning combination that is internally won at the same time as watermelon or cherry.

In the present embodiment, watermelon and cherry are respectively won when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and when the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. Further, Bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Hereinafter, the bell is also referred to as a pushing role.

The AT state is a game state in which information (details of stop operation) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the player wins an internal win for a chance combination or a push-up combination. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display 127 are used to execute the operation navigation for informing the content of the stop operation to help win a prize. Specifically, when the winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is announced, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the timing of the stop operation (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the details of the stop operation of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by operation navigation.

On the other hand, the normal state is a state in which operation navigation is not executed even if the player wins internally for a chance combination or a push-up combination.

In this embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state is shifted to the AT state. In the AT lottery, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not a winning combination is won based on the result of an internal winning combination lottery. Further, in this embodiment, when the number of games played in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling number of games), the state is shifted to the AT state. That is, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, or when the number of games played in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of games, the state is shifted to the AT state, and a predetermined number of AT games is awarded. In the AT state, an AT add-on lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, and when winning the AT add-on lottery, a predetermined number of AT games is added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the given AT game numbers are consumed, the AT state ends and shifts to the normal state.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and if there is an insertion operation lights up the winning line display lamp 120 according to the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, and the first sub-control section 400 In response, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, an effective pay line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number acquired in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally winning combination is operated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal winning combination lottery is lost (the winning combination is In the case of non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination for which the order of stop operation is required, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these are selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is changed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of reel frames set in the stop data. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing is performed. In the winning determination process, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning. judged to have won the role. For example, if "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is aligned on the activated prize line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of BB winning, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 24) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 23 is returned to.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 25(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 25(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 25(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 25A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 26(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 26(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 26(d) is a flow chart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 26A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read out in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 26A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Example L1>
Example L1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 36. FIG. In embodiment L1, a panel attack effect is executed under a certain time limit during eight games of RB. The panel attack effect is an image effect using the effect image display device 157 . More specifically, the panel attack effect is performed by moving the cursor (indicated by C in the drawing) on a grid-like panel (indicated by P in the drawing) provided on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and moving. When the cursor stops, the panel at the position of the stopped cursor is erased, and the hidden image behind the erased panel is exposed (on the drawing The exposed image is indicated as d1). Note that, among the panel attack effects, the effect that the panel disappears is called a panel erasing effect. The panel attack effect is a effect related to the stop operation, and can be said to include both this panel erase effect and the reel stop effect of stopping the reels 110-112.

FIG. 27(a) is a diagram showing the appearance of a panel provided on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and FIG. 27(b) shows the movement path of the cursor (indicated by RT on the drawing). It is a diagram. In Example L1, it is composed of 7×7=49 panels, and some of the panels are special panels (panels marked with the letter B, indicated by BP on the drawing). . Hereinafter, the panel on which the letter B is displayed is called a bomb panel, and the other panels are called normal panels. On such a panel, the cursor moves in a horizontal zigzag direction from the upper left corner of the screen to the lower right corner of the screen, as indicated by the movement path.

In addition, in Example L1, 49 panels of 7×7 are used, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be more or less than 7×7. For example, the player may be allowed to select the difficulty level, and the number of vertical and horizontal panels may be changed according to the difficulty level. In addition, although the moving speed of the cursor is constant in the embodiment L1, it is not limited to this, and the moving speed may be variable. For example, the moving speed of the cursor may be changed according to the number of remaining RB games, the remaining time limit, and the difficulty level.

In Example L1, when the cursor stops at the position of the normal panel, the region of the stopped panel is erased and the rear image of the panel region is displayed. On the other hand, when the cursor stops at the position of the bomb panel, the areas of multiple panels including the stopped panel (for example, the top, bottom, left, and right panels adjacent to the bomb panel) are erased, and the rear image of the multiple panel areas is displayed. be done. FIG. 27(c) is an example of the overall image d10 arranged behind the panel, and the image d1 is an image displayed by partially exposing the overall image d10. The overall image d10 may be, for example, an image that informs the player of advantageous information, or may be an image that suggests setting values, for example. That is, the panel attack effect (panel erasing effect) may be an effect for giving a predetermined privilege to the player.

FIG. 27(d) is a diagram for explaining the image display of the panel erasing effect (hereinafter referred to as panel erasing effect display). The panel erasing effect display d20 is a display in which a cloud-like balloon image suddenly displayed on the entire screen in response to the stop operation gradually becomes smaller and finally disappears. As the cloudy image disappears, the image behind is exposed and displayed. The display time of the panel erasing effect display d20 is the execution time TA of the panel erasing effect. The execution time TA in Example L1 is the same regardless of whether the cursor stops at the normal panel position or at the bomb panel position.

Here, in the panel attack effect of embodiment L1, it is possible to stop the cursor a maximum of 24 times (=8G×3) within the time limit. There is a need to. Therefore, the panel attack effect is a effect that requires careful stopping operations.

Further, in the panel attack effect of Example L1, an operation invalid time TB is provided between the first stop operation and the second stop operation and between the second stop operation and the third stop operation. The operation invalid time TB is a period in which the target reel is stopped even if a stop operation is received during this period, but the panel erase effect is not executed based on this stop operation. In the embodiment L1, the operation invalid time TB is the same time as the execution time TA of the panel clear effect. In other words, it is possible to execute the next panel erasing effect after the currently executed panel erasing effect is completed. As a result, the player can clearly see the entire panel erasing effect.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an overview of the panel erasing effect based on the first stop operation when the left reel 110 is used as the first stop reel. FIG. 28(a) shows an overview of the panel erasing effect when the cursor stops at the normal panel, one panel at the position where the cursor has stopped is erased, and the image d1 for one panel is displayed. It shows the mode of production in this case. On the other hand, FIG. 28(b) shows the case where the cursor stops on the bomb panel, and not only the panel where the cursor stops but also the eight adjacent panels, a total of nine panels are erased, and the panel It shows a rendering mode when nine images d1 are displayed.

FIG. 29 shows that in a game in which a panel attack effect is being executed, the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation>the operation invalid time TB, and the time interval between the second stop operation and the third stop operation 4 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2>operation invalid time TB. In this case, since the second stop operation and the third stop operation are the stop operations after the panel erase effect is completed, the panel erase effect is performed based on each of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. Execution is started.

Note that the cursor movement display shown in FIG. 29 refers to an image display in which the cursor is moving, and the cursor stop display refers to an image display in which the cursor is stopped (the same applies hereinafter). In the embodiment L1, as shown in FIG. 29, while the panel erasing effect display is being performed, the cursor stop display is performed, and after the execution time TA (operation invalid time TB) elapses, the cursor movement display is started. It has become.

FIG. 30 shows a case where the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation<operation invalid time TB. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of a panel clear effect based on the first stop operation and the second stop operation in the case. In this case, first, the left reel 110 is stopped based on the first stop operation, and the panel erasing effect is also started to be executed. Subsequently, the middle reel 110 is stopped based on the second stop operation, but since the panel elimination effect started based on the first stop operation is still being executed, a new panel elimination effect based on the second stop operation is not executed. Not executed.

As described above, in Example L1, even if there is a stop operation, there is a case where the panel clear effect is not executed. This is for the purpose of clearly showing the panel erasing effect to the player. That is, in the panel attack effect, (1) when both the effect of stopping the reels 110 to 112 and the panel erasing effect are executed based on one stop operation, (2) the reels 110 to 112 are executed based on one stop operation. There is a case where an effect to stop only is executed.

FIG. 31 shows that in a game in which a panel attack effect is being executed, the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation < operation invalid time TB, and the time interval between the second stop operation and the third stop operation 4 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2<operation invalid time TB. In this case, the panel clear effect based on the first stop operation ends at time t1 when the operation invalid time TB has passed from time t0 of the first stop operation. The panel erasing effect based on the 3 stop operation is not executed. Note that the stopped cursor starts to move and display from time t1.

It should be noted that, in the embodiment L1, when the panel erasing effect being executed ends, that is, when the execution time TA (=operation invalid time TB) elapses from the stop operation, the panel erasing effect based on the next stop operation is executed. Apart from this, if a stop operation is performed during the operation invalid time TB, the measurement of the operation invalid time TB is reset and the operation invalid time TB has elapsed since the time of the stop operation. may be re-measured (Modification 1).

FIG. 32 shows a game in which the panel attack effect of Modification 1 is executed, in which the operation interval time T1<operation invalid time TB between the first stop operation and the second stop operation, and the second stop operation and the second stop operation 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2 between three stop operations<operation invalid time TB. In this case, since the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed in a period in which the operation invalid time TB does not elapse from the previous stop operation, the panel is erased based on the second stop operation and the third stop operation in the game. No performance is performed. In addition, since the measurement of the operation invalid time TB is reset each time the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed, the cursor movement display is started at the time t1 when the operation invalid time TB has passed from the time t0 of the third stop operation. do.

In the embodiment L1, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the execution time TA of the panel clear effect and the operation invalid time TB are set to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b), execution time TA of panel clear effect<operation invalid time TB may be satisfied, or as shown in FIG. 33(c), execution time TA of panel clear effect>operation invalid time. TB may be used. In the case of FIG. 33(b), it is possible to pay attention to and enjoy the effect after the panel erasing effect is finished. Also, in the case of FIG. 33(c), the user can enjoy the panel erasing effect from the beginning to the middle.

In the embodiment L1, the execution time TA of the panel erasing effect is the same when the cursor stops on the normal panel and when the cursor stops on the bomb panel. Good (Modification 2).

FIG. 34 shows each device when the cursor stops on the normal panel based on the first stop operation and stops on the bomb panel based on the second stop operation in the game executing the panel attack effect of the second modification. is a timing chart showing the operation of In FIG. 34, the execution time TA1 of the panel erasing effect when the cursor stops on the normal panel and the execution time TA2 of the panel erasing effect when the cursor stops on the bomb panel are indicated.

For example, execution time TA1<execution time TA2 as shown in FIG. 34(a), or execution time TA1>execution time TA2 as shown in FIG. 34(b). The panel erasing effect shown in FIG. 34(a) has an execution time that matches the size of the panel area to be erased, so the effect is natural with a sense of unity whether the user stops at the normal panel or the bomb panel. can be realized. On the other hand, in the panel erasing effect shown in FIG. 34(b), the more panel areas to be erased, the shorter the execution time.

In addition, in the panel attack effect of the above embodiment L1, the number of panels to be erased in the panel erasing effect varies depending on whether the cursor is stopped at the normal panel or the bomb panel. You may perform an attack production.

For example, when the cursor moves along the movement path on a grid-like panel as shown in FIG. A benefit that is advantageous to the player who stops the cursor at a closer position may be given. Also, if the cursor is stopped at a position closer to the special bomb panel, an operation response effect with a longer execution time may be executed. In this case, the operation response effect with a long execution time may suggest giving a privilege more advantageous to the player than the operation response effect with a short execution time.

Specifically, the benefits when the cursor is stopped on the panel (denoted as NP in the drawing) one before or one after on the movement path of the special bomb panel shown in FIG. It is also a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege when it is stopped at a panel (denoted as FP in the drawing) that is two ahead or two ahead on the movement path of the special bomb panel shown in 16 (c). good.

In the above embodiment L1, the panel attack effect is executed in the RB game, but the game in which the panel attack effect is executed is not limited to RB. For example, it may be executed in a game state advantageous to the player, such as an AT state or a BB game. In addition, in the above-described embodiment L1, the panel clear effect is executed for one operation of each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, but other operations such as simultaneous operation of multiple buttons and slide operation of multiple buttons are executed. may apply. In this case, for example, the panel clear effect may be executed for the operation detected first in the simultaneous operation or the slide operation, or the panel clear effect may be executed for the operation detected later. . In the latter case, a reel stop effect of stopping the reels is executed for the previous operation, and a reel stop effect of stopping the reels and a panel erasing effect are executed for the subsequent operation.

Further, the panel attack effect of Example L1 has been described as an effect on the effect image display device 157 of the slot machine 100, but the target of the panel attack effect is not limited to the slot machine 100. FIG. For example, the panel attack effect shown in FIG. 35 may be applied to a game machine.

FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the panel attack effect executed by the game machine. The panel attack effect shown in FIG. 36 is a effect in which a cursor falling from top to bottom is stopped based on a stop operation, and a better evaluation can be obtained by stopping the cursor at a position closer to a predetermined line TL. be. For example, PERFECT (good evaluation) is given when the cursor is stopped on a predetermined line TL, and GOOD (ordinary evaluation) is given when the cursor is stopped within a predetermined range R1 near the predetermined line TL. evaluation), and when the cursor is stopped outside the predetermined range R1, an evaluation of BAD (bad evaluation) is given, and an effect according to the evaluation is executed, or a privilege according to the evaluation is given. good.

Also, a panel attack effect may be executed on a pachinko machine equipped with a chance button. For example, the panel attack effect may be executed during 15 rounds of the jackpot, and the panel elimination effect may be executed based on the operation of the chance button. As a rule, for example, the chance button can be operated up to three times in one round, and an operation invalid time is provided between chance button operations. When the chance button is operated after the operation invalid time has elapsed, the panel clear effect is executed based on the operation of the chance button, but the next chance button is operated before the operation invalid time has elapsed. In this case, the panel clear effect may not be executed based on the operation of the chance button.

<Example M1>
Example M1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. FIG. In the embodiment M1, in the internal bonus winning state (BB1 and BB2), there is an effect (e.g., bonus combination symbol combination) that notifies the symbol of the internally won bonus combination and instructs to align the symbol combination of the internally won bonus combination. , an effect that instructs one symbol among the stop modes including the symbol combination of the bonus combination, hereinafter referred to as a bonus symbol notification effect) may be executed. Then, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is being executed, one symbol constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the internally won bonus combination is stop-displayed on the active line based on the player's first stop operation. In this case, a bonus symbol stop effect indicating that the bonus symbol has stopped on the active line is executed.

FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB1 internal winning state. The bonus symbol notification effect is an image display effect, and as shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(c), the image d30 showing the symbol combination of BB1 is displayed as the effect image from the first stop operation to the third stop operation. This is an effect displayed on the display device 157 . The bonus pattern stop effect is a voice output effect, and as shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(c), the effect of outputting predetermined sounds v1 to v3 congratulating the stopping of the bonus symbols from the speakers 272 and 277. is.

FIG. 37(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the left reel 110 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the left reel 110, the slot machine 100 outputs the first voice v1 (for example, "I'm sure!~") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

FIG. 37(b) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the middle reel 111, the slot machine 100 outputs the second voice v2 (for example, "I did it!") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

FIG. 37(c) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the right reel 112 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the right reel 112, the slot machine 100 outputs the third voice v3 (eg, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

As described above, the slot machine 100 of the embodiment M1 executes different bonus symbol stop effects in accordance with the reel targeted by the first stop operation in the BB1 internal winning state. Various performances can be provided to the player in the executed game, and interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

In addition, in the BB1 internal winning state of the embodiment M1, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect was executed, when the symbol of BB1 was stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop effect was executed. A bonus symbol stop effect may be executed at a predetermined rate even when a specific symbol other than the symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

FIG. 38(a) is a diagram for explaining the effect outline of the small winning symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state. In this embodiment, the bonus combination is a simultaneous winning combination in which Watermelon or Cherry is internally won at the same time, so there is a case where Watermelon or Cherry is won in the BB1 internal winning state. Therefore, in the BB1 internal winning state, there is a case where the small winning symbol notification effect is executed. The small winning pattern notification effect is a presentation image display effect for notifying the internally won small winning pattern and instructing to align the small winning pattern combination, and the simultaneously winning small winning pattern (for example, a watermelon pattern). is displayed on the effect image display device 157 from the first stop operation to the third stop operation.

FIG. 38(a) shows a case where the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation in a game in which the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed. In this case, the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the active line of the middle reel 111, but the slot machine 100 does not output the sound of the bonus symbol stop effect from the speakers 272 and 277.例文帳に追加That is, in the game in which the BB1 internal winning state of the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed, even if the player ignores the content of the notification and stops the BB1 symbol on the effective line for the predetermined reel, the bonus symbol is stopped. No performance is performed.

FIG. 38(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 37(b)) for comparison with FIG. 38(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the effective line for a predetermined reel, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b), in Example M1, even if the symbols of BB1 stop on the active line on the same predetermined reel, the bonus symbols are displayed in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed. Although the stop performance is executed, the bonus symbol stop performance is not executed in the game in which the bonus symbol notification performance is not executed (specifically, the game in which the minor winning symbol notification performance is executed). As a result, it is possible to improve consistency between the symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect, and to increase the reliability of the symbol notification effect.

In the embodiment M1, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed with a probability of 100%, and in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is not executed. When the symbol of BB1 stops on the active line, the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed with a probability of 100%, but it is not limited to this. In a broad sense, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line on the same predetermined reel, the probability of executing the bonus symbol notification effect in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed>Bonus in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is not executed It suffices if it is the probability of executing the symbol notification effect.

FIG. 38(c) is a diagram showing a modification of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the minor winning symbol notification effect. The image d32 shown in FIG. 38(c) is an image displaying the symbol combination of BB1 together with the symbols of the minor winning combination. In this way, in the small win symbol notification effect, a symbol different from BB1 may be displayed together with the symbol combination of BB1. It may not be executed. That is, in the minor winning symbol notification effect, at least a symbol different from the bonus symbol should be displayed in the displayed effect image.

FIG. 39(a) is a diagram for explaining an example of an overview of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB2 internal winning state. Even in the BB2 internal winning state, there is a case where the bonus symbol notification effect is executed in the same way as in the BB1 internal winning state. The bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state is an effect of displaying the image d40 showing the symbol combination of BB2 on the effect image display device 157 from the first stop operation to the third stop operation.

FIG. 39(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB2 symbol has stopped on the active line of the middle reel 111, the slot machine 100 outputs a second voice v1 (for example, "Ichika!~") from the speakers 272 and 277 as a bonus. Execute the pattern stop effect.

FIG. 39(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 37(a)) for comparison with FIG. 39(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the activated line with respect to the left reel 110 based on the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 , to execute a bonus symbol stop effect for outputting a second voice v1 (for example, “Ichika!~”) from the speakers 272 and 277.

As described above, in the embodiment M1, the slot machine 100 executes the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state, as shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b). 111), when the symbol of BB2 stops on the activated line, the bonus symbol notification effect of outputting the second sound v1 is executed. For example, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line on the left reel 110), the bonus symbol stop effect of outputting the second sound v1, that is, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed. As a result, even if the content of the bonus symbol notification effect is different, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed for different stop operations, so the interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

FIG. 40(a) is a diagram for explaining another example of the effect outline of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB2 internal winning state.

FIG. 40(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the right reel 112 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB2 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the right reel 112, the slot machine 100 outputs the second sound v3 (for example, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277 as a bonus symbol. Execute the stop effect.

FIG. 40(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 37(c)) for comparison with FIG. 40(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the activated line with respect to the right reel 112 by the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 operates as a bonus symbol. A symbol stop effect is executed, and a bonus symbol stop effect of outputting a third voice v3 (for example, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277 is executed.

As described above, in the embodiment M1, the slot machine 100 executes the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state, as shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b). 112), when the symbol of BB2 stops on the active line, the first bonus symbol notification effect of outputting the sound v3 is executed, while the BB1 is on the first reel (for example, the right reel 112) in the BB1 internal winning state. symbol stops on the activated line, the first bonus symbol notification effect of outputting a voice v3, that is, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed. As a result, even if the content of the bonus symbol notification effect is different, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed for the same stop operation, so the interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

In addition, in the BB2 internal winning state of the embodiment M1, the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, and when the BB2 symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed. Even when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop performance may be executed at a predetermined rate.

37 to 40 explained the bonus symbol stop effect for the first stop operation, but the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed only for the first stop operation. The bonus symbol stop effect is executed also for the second stop operation and the third stop operation.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the effect outline of the bonus symbol stop effect from the first stop operation to the third stop operation in the BB1 internal winning state. Specifically, in FIG. 22, the stop operation is performed with the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel 110, and the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed in any stop operation. indicates the case. It should be noted that FIG. 41(a) shows an outline of an effect when a bonus symbol notification effect is executed, and FIG. 41(b) shows an effect outline when a minor winning symbol notification effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), when the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect of outputting the sound v2 for the first stop operation (see FIGS. 37(b) and 38(b)). , a bonus pattern stop effect (see FIG. 37(c)) that outputs a voice v3 for the second stop operation, and a bonus that outputs a voice v4 (for example, "Big bonus!") for the third stop operation Execute the pattern stop effect. A bonus symbol stop effect (see FIG. 37(a)) for outputting a voice v1 may be executed for the third stop operation.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41(b), when the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed for the first stop operation (see FIG. 38(a)), A bonus symbol stop effect that outputs a voice v3 for the second stop operation (see FIG. 37(c)), and a bonus symbol that outputs a voice v4 (for example, "Big bonus!") for the third stop operation Execute the stop effect. A bonus symbol stop effect (see FIG. 37(a)) for outputting a voice v1 may be executed for the third stop operation.

As described above, in the embodiment M1, even when the symbol combination of BB1 is stopped and displayed with the same stop operation content, when the bonus symbol notification effect and the minor winning symbol notification effect are executed, the first stop operation is performed. There is a difference regarding whether or not the bonus symbol stop effect is executed. However, for the second stop operation and the third stop operation, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed.

Examples L1 and M1 of the present embodiment have been described above, but the example of the present embodiment is not limited to this, and each example may be combined.

<Summary of embodiment>
(1) As described above, according to the amusement machine (e.g., slot machine 100, pachinko machine, game machine, etc.) of the above-described embodiment (e.g., Example L1),
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, operation buttons such as stop buttons 137 to 139, main control unit 300, production buttons, and chance buttons);
Effect means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277 , various lamps 336, 420, etc.);
A game table comprising
When the operation means receives a first operation (for example, a first stop operation, etc.) during execution of the first effect (hereinafter referred to as a first case), the effect means performs the first Means capable of executing an operation response effect (for example, a panel deletion effect based on the first stop operation) (for example, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, etc.),
In the first case, when a second operation (e.g., second stop operation, etc.) is performed after the first time (e.g., operation invalid time TB, etc.) has elapsed after the first operation is performed (hereinafter , the second case), the effect means executes a second operation response effect (for example, a panel erase effect based on the second stop operation) (for example, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, etc.),
In the first case, if the second operation is performed before the first time elapses after the first operation is performed, the second operation response effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 30, Figure 31, etc.),
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, the second operation response effect may or may not be executed depending on the second operation timing, but the first operation response effect is reliably executed. , the first operation response performance is prioritized over the second response performance, and the player can firmly confirm it. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has not existed in the past.

In the above first basic configuration,
The rendering means is means for executing at least part of the first operation response rendering during at least part of the first time (for example, FIG. 29, FIG. 33, etc.),
This is the first preferred configuration.

According to the first preferred configuration, it is possible to clearly show the player the first operation response effect at the first time.

The first time may be the same as the execution time of the first operation response effect, the first time may be shorter than the execution time of the first operation response effect, The first time may be longer than the execution time of the first operation response effect.

In the first basic configuration or the first preferred configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of changing the execution time of the first operation response effect according to the time when the operation means receives the first operation (for example, FIG. 34),
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to the second preferred configuration, since the execution time of the first operation response effect is the time intended by the player, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, or second preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of changing the first time according to the execution time of the first operation response effect (for example, FIG. 34),
This is the third preferred configuration.

According to the third preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the second operation as well.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, or third preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of executing the first operation response effect requiring a second time (for example, execution time TA),
The effect means is means capable of executing the first operation response effect by requiring a third time longer than the second time (for example, execution time TA2 in FIG. 34(a)). ,
When the effect means executes the first operation response effect taking the third time (hereinafter referred to as the third case), the effect means takes the second time and executes the first operation response effect. There is a high possibility that the player will be more advantageous than when one operation response effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the fourth case) (for example, FIG. 34 (a), etc.),
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to the fourth preferable configuration, since the execution time of the first operation response effect is lengthened, it is possible to concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the fourth preferred configuration,
The production means includes display means (for example, production image display device 157, display, etc.),
The first effect is a display effect in which a cursor display (for example, the cursor display in FIGS. 35 and 36) moves on a route including the target display,
The fourth case is a case where the cursor display position is the first position (for example, panel FP, area R1, etc.) and the first operation is received,
The third case is a case where the cursor display position is the second position (for example, panel NP, line TL, etc.) and the first operation is accepted,
the second position is closer to the target display than the first position;
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to the fifth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on performing the first operation at a position close to the target display.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, third preferred configuration, fourth preferred configuration, or fifth preferred configuration,
The rendering means performs a third operation response rendering when a third operation (for example, a third stop operation, etc.) is received after the first time has elapsed from the second operation in the second case. (For example, a panel erasing effect based on the third stop operation, etc.) can be executed,
After receiving the second operation before the first time elapses from the first operation in the first case, the effect means elapses the first time from the second operation. Means that does not execute the third operation response effect if the third operation is received before
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to the sixth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player firmly confirm the first operation response effect.

In the sixth preferred configuration,
After receiving the second operation before the first time elapses from the first operation in the first case, the effect means elapses the first time from the second operation. Execution of the first operation response effect may be terminated before
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to the seventh preferred configuration, it is possible to carefully operate the operating means.

The first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, the second preferred configuration, the third preferred configuration, the fourth preferred configuration, the fifth preferred configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, or in a seventh preferred configuration,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to the eighth preferred configuration, the above effects can be applied to slot machines.

The first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, the second preferred configuration, the third preferred configuration, the fourth preferred configuration, the fifth preferred configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, or in a seventh preferred configuration,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to the ninth preferred configuration, the above effects can be applied to the pachinko machine.
(2) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100, pachinko machine, game machine, etc.) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example L1),
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, operation buttons such as stop buttons 137 to 139, main control unit 300, production buttons, and chance buttons);
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, reels 110-112, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 336 , 420, etc.) and
A game table comprising
The directing means is
First effect means (for example, first sub-control means 400, second sub-control means 500, effect image display device 158, etc.) capable of executing a first response effect (for example, panel erasing effect, etc.);
Second effect means (for example, main control unit 300, reels 110 to 112, etc.) capable of executing a second response effect (for example, stopping reels 110 to 112);
with
The effect means executes both the first response effect and the second response effect when the operation means receives a first operation (for example, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, etc.). There is a case (hereinafter referred to as the first case),
The effect means is such that the operation means performs a second operation (for example, when the first operation is the first stop operation, the second stop operation, when the first operation is the second stop operation, the first stop operation, etc.). ) is received, there is a case where only the second response effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the second case) (for example, FIG. 31),
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, since the response performance can be varied according to the operation of the operating means, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and to execute a new performance that has never existed before. can.

In the above second basic configuration,
The effect means, in the first case, when the second operation is performed before a first time (for example, operation invalid time TB) elapses after the first operation is performed A means for the second case,
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

In addition, in the above second basic configuration,
The effecting means is means for becoming the first case when the first operation is performed before the first time elapses after the second operation is performed in the second case. is
This is the tenth-1 preferred configuration.

According to the tenth preferred configuration or the tenth-1 preferred configuration, when the operation interval between the first operation and the second operation is less than the first time, the first operation and the second Since different response effects can be executed by the operation of , it is possible to provide diverse response effects.

In the tenth preferred configuration or the tenth-1 preferred configuration,
In the first case, the effect means is means for executing at least part of the first response effect in at least part of the first time,
This is the eleventh preferred configuration.

According to the eleventh preferred configuration, it is possible to clearly show the player the first response effect at the first time.

In the eleventh preferred configuration,
Equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate,
The operation means are stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels,
The second effect means are the plurality of reels,
This is the twelfth preferred configuration.

According to the twelfth preferable configuration, the first response effect may or may not be executed in response to the stop operation, but the reels can always be stopped.

In the eleventh preferred configuration or the twelfth preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of changing the execution time of the first response effect in accordance with the timing at which the operation means receives the first operation.
This is the thirteenth preferred configuration.

According to the thirteenth preferable configuration, since the execution time of the first response effect is the time intended by the player, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the eleventh preferred configuration, the twelfth preferred configuration, or the thirteenth preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of changing the first time according to the execution time of the first response effect,
This is the fourteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fourteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the second operation as well.

In the eleventh preferred arrangement, the twelfth preferred arrangement, the thirteenth preferred arrangement, or the fourteenth preferred arrangement,
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first response effect requiring a second time (for example, execution time TA),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first response effect by requiring a third time longer than the second time (for example, execution time TA2 in FIG. 34(a)),
When the effect means takes the third time to execute the first response effect (hereinafter referred to as the third case), the effect means takes the second time to execute the first response effect. is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the response effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the fourth case) (for example, FIG. 34 (a), etc.),
This is the fifteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fifteenth preferable configuration, since the execution time of the first response effect is lengthened, it is possible to concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration above,
The production means includes display means (for example, production image display device 157, display, etc.),
The effect means is a means capable of executing a display effect in which a cursor display (for example, the cursor display in FIGS. 35 and 36, etc.) moves on a path including the target display,
The fourth case is a case where the first operation is accepted while the cursor display position is the first position (for example, panel FP, area R1, etc.) during execution of the display effect,
The third case is a case where the first operation is received while the display effect is being executed and the cursor is displayed at a second position (for example, panel NP, line TL, etc.),
the second position is closer to the target display than the first position;
This is the sixteenth preferred configuration.

According to the sixteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on performing the first operation at a position close to the target display.
(3) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
Notification means capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
A game table comprising
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a first instruction (e.g., instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB1) in a first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state);
the first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
The first instruction can stop the first symbol (eg, BB1 symbol) among the stop modes including the first symbol combination (eg, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result. is an instruction indicating that
The effect means performs a first symbol stop effect (e.g., " It is a means that can execute voice output such as "I did it",
The effect means, when the notification means executes notification regarding the first instruction, executes the first symbol stop effect more than when the notification means does not execute notification regarding the first instruction. is a means with a high probability of
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, when the first instruction is executed, the probability of executing the first symbol stop effect is higher than when the first instruction is not executed, so the effect consistency can be improved, and a novel production that has not existed in the past can be executed.

In the third basic configuration above,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a second instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the watermelon pattern) in the first state,
the second instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display a symbol (for example, a watermelon symbol) that corresponds to the first result and is different from the first symbol combination;
When the notification regarding the first instruction is not executed, including the case where the notification means executes the notification regarding the second instruction (for example, FIG. 38 (b), (c), etc.),
This is the seventeenth preferred configuration.

According to the seventeenth preferred configuration, no instruction information that is disadvantageous to the player is given.

In the above seventeenth preferred configuration,
The notification means executes notification regarding the second instruction until a stopping operation (for example, a third stopping operation) is performed on a reel to be stopped last (for example, a third stop reel) among the plurality of reels. do,
This is the eighteenth preferred configuration.

According to the eighteenth preferable configuration, the player can understand that the combination corresponding to the different symbols can be arranged.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, or the eighteenth preferred configuration,
When the certain symbol (for example, BB1 symbol) is stop-displayed on a reel other than the certain reel among the plurality of reels, the effect means performs a second symbol stop effect (for example, "Let's go!"). such as voice output) is a viable means,
The effect means, when the notification means executes the notification regarding the first instruction, and when the notification means does not execute the notification regarding the first instruction, among the plurality of reels Means capable of executing the second symbol stop effect on reels other than the first stopped reel (for example, second stop reel, third stop reel) (for example, FIG. 41),
This is the 19th preferred configuration.

According to the nineteenth preferred configuration, for example, the pattern stop effect is executed also in the second stop operation and the third stop operation, so the interest can be improved.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, or the nineteenth preferred configuration,
The stop control means is capable of stop-displaying the first symbol combination even when the notification means does not perform notification regarding the first instruction in the first state (for example, Fig. 38(a), etc.)
This is the twentieth preferred configuration.

According to the twentieth preferred configuration, even if the first instruction is not executed, the first symbol combination can be stop-displayed at one's own will, so the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, the nineteenth preferred configuration, or the twentieth preferred configuration,
The probability that the first symbol stop effect is executed when the notification means does not execute the notification regarding the first instruction is 0.
This is the 20th-1 preferred configuration.
(4) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
A game table comprising
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in the first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in a second state (e.g., BB2 internal winning state),
the first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
the second state is a state in which a second result (for example, BB2) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
The effect means selects the first symbol (for example, BB1 symbol) among the stop modes including the first symbol combination (for example, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result in the first state. ) is stop-displayed on the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) of the plurality of reels, means for executing the second symbol stop effect,
The effect means selects the second symbol (eg, BB2 symbol) among the stop modes including the second symbol combination (eg, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the second result in the second state. ) is stop-displayed on the second reel (for example, the middle reel 111) of the plurality of reels, a means for executing the second symbol stop effect,
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to the fourth basic configuration, the symbols constituting the first symbol combination or the symbols constituting the second symbol combination are stopped and displayed on different reels to execute the second symbol stop effect. Therefore, it may be possible to specify the result of internal winning by grasping the stop reel in the second symbol stop effect. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has not existed in the past.

Further, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) , and
A game table comprising
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in the first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state),
The effect means is a means capable of executing a third pattern stop effect (for example, outputting a sound such as "Let's go") in the first state,
the first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
The effect means selects a first symbol among the stop modes including a first symbol combination (eg, a symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result (eg, BB1) in the first state. means for executing the second symbol stop effect when (for example, BB1 symbol) is stop-displayed on the first reel (for example, left reel 110) of the plurality of reels,
The effect means produces the third symbol stop effect when the first symbol is stop-displayed on a third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the first state. is the means to carry out
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to the fifth basic configuration, different symbol stop effects are executed according to the reels on which the symbols constituting the first symbol combination are stop-displayed, so that the symbol stop effects are varied according to the stop reels. be able to. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has not existed in the past.

In the fourth basic configuration or the fifth basic configuration,
The effect means produces the second symbol based on a stop operation (for example, a first stop operation) for stopping a first reel (for example, a first stop reel) of the plurality of reels in the first state. It is a means that can execute the stop production,
This is the 21st preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-first preferred configuration, it is possible to grasp that the first result is internally won at the time of the first stop operation.

In the fourth basic configuration above,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a third symbol stop effect (for example, outputting a sound such as "Let's go") in the first state,
The effect means produces the third symbol stop effect when the first symbol is stop-displayed on a third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the first state. is a means of carrying out
The effect means stops the third symbol when the second symbol is stop-displayed on the third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the second state. is a means of carrying out the performance,
This is the 22nd preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-second preferred configuration, the same symbol stop effect is executed for the same reel even if the internal winning results are different, so the symbol stop effect can be shared.

In the twenty-second preferred configuration,
The effect means provides the third symbol stop effect based on a stop operation (for example, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, or a third stop operation) for stopping one of the plurality of reels. is a viable means of
This is the 23rd preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-third preferred configuration, the third symbol stop effect can be executed for any stop operation, so that the sense of anticipation for each stop operation can be improved.

In the 22nd preferred configuration or the 23rd preferred configuration,
A notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, the effect image display device 157, etc.) is provided,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a first instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB1) in the first state,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a second instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB2) in the second state,
the first instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display the first symbol combination corresponding to the first result;
The second instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display the second symbol combination corresponding to the second result.
This is the twenty-fourth preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-fourth preferred configuration, since an instruction is issued according to the internal winning result, consistency of presentation can be enhanced.

<Other game machines>
In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as game media is shown as an example of the game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used in the game. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu game machines, smart balls, casino machines, etc., which are used as media.

For example, a pachinko machine consists of "a launching device that shoots game balls into a predetermined game area, a start winning hole configured to allow the game balls fired from the launching device to enter, and a game in which a ball enters the start winning hole. Detecting means for detecting a ball, payout means for paying out a game ball when the detecting means detects the game ball (or awarding means for awarding a value equivalent to the game ball), and predetermined patterns (identification information) are varied. A pachinko machine equipped with a variable display device for displaying, and triggered by the detection of a game ball by a detection means, the variable display device changes the pattern and then stops displaying to announce the transition of the game state. It can be.

The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals. Input is from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device with a function that can store the number of lent medals by an electronic method or a function that can store the number of medals won by an electronic method) , includes inputting digitized data, and paying out game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those involving such variations and modifications are also intended to be within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 42 to 50. FIG. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 50 are used only for the explanation of this embodiment. 42 to 50 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as the production button 132 .

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. .

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player of the change, the light may also be turned on when performing various notifications described later.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. An upper lamp 142 (a first upper lamp 142a and a second upper lamp 142b shown in FIG. 45, etc.) provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 make the game exciting. In addition to being a decorative lamp, it may be turned on when performing various notifications to be described later.

A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.), and will be described later. It may be displayed when performing various notifications to be performed.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the whole of the display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 43 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is stored. A case 220 is provided. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the controller.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112. Each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Error display/overview during reel rotation>
Next, an overview of error display during reel rotation will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 42) includes notification means, and the notification means detects when the second error is detected in the first period a first error annunciation in which the detected error is not identifiable as the second error, and during a second time period after the first time period, the detected error is the second error; A second error notification that can be identified as an error can be executed.

Here, the "informing means" according to the present invention means means capable of informing, for example, display means capable of informing an error by display (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 42), , sound output means (in this example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 44) capable of announcing an error by sound, and light emitting means (in this example, a first upper part shown in FIG. 45) capable of announcing an error by emitting light. In addition to the lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlight of each reel 110 to 112), and the error notification due to the movement of the movable body. Possible movable means (reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 42 in this example) and the like correspond.

Errors that can occur in slot machines include, for example, door open errors, hopper empty errors, medal insertion errors 1-4, medal payout errors 1-3, overflow errors, RAM defects, winning errors, and the like.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. A hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number, and the prescribed number of medals or more is delivered to the hopper. Resolved by supplementing.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are accumulated, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number, and can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing. This occurs when the path does not pass normally, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and medal payout error 3 occurs. occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and both are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. .

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box is turned on, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when an operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is canceled when the operation of the error cancellation switch is accepted.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include, for example, lower tray full error, dispensing device error, excess dispensing error, illegal dispensing error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame opening error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

Further, the “first period” according to the present invention is, for example, the period of one game, and as a specific example, after the reels 110 to 112 start rotating by pressing the start lever 135, the stop button 137 139 until the reels 110 to 112 stop rotating. In addition, it is preferable that the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved in the second period after the first period.

Further, the "first error notification" is an error notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. "An error has occurred", "Anomaly detected", "Please call the staff", "Please clear the error", etc.

In addition, the "second error notification" is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error. , "Error code: E3" display and voice), and notifications that suggest the location of the error (e.g., "Please check the medal selector", "Door is open", etc.). do.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine or pachinko machine shown in FIG. 42) includes display means, and the display means is capable of displaying a first display showing game information, means capable of displaying a first error display, the first error display being a display executed when a second error is detected during the first period, and the display means displaying the first When the second error is detected during the execution of the first display during the period, the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention means means capable of displaying the first display, the first error display, and the second error display. For example, the liquid crystal display shown in FIG. Apparatus 157 etc. correspond.

Further, the "first display" according to the present invention is a display showing game information, for example, an operation instruction display (operation navigation) showing information for instructing the operation of the player, or Display of the total number of acquired game media, display of the number of AT sets, display of the initial number of AT games, display of the number of AT additional games, display of the number of times operation navigation has been performed, display of the number of times the player has This includes display of acquired points and items, display of the number of game media paid out, and the like.

Further, the "first error display" according to the present invention is a display executed when the second error is detected in the first period, for example, "an error has occurred", " This applies to displays such as "Anomaly detected", "Please call the staff", "Please clear the error", etc. Even if the first error display is executed, the player can still see the first display. Therefore, display having transparency is preferable.

Further, the "second error display" according to the present invention is a display that is executed when a second error is detected during the first period. For example, a display representing an error name or error code ( For example, displays such as "error in the number of medals passed" and "error code: E3"), and displays suggesting where the error occurred (for example, displays such as "please check the medal selector" and "the door is open"). ) applies, and execution of the second error display makes the first display invisible, preferably the display is non-transmissive (non-transmissive).

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 1>
Next, Example 1 of error display during reel rotation will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed.

Here, the "display device" in FIG. 46 is display means capable of announcing errors by display (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 45), and the "speaker" is capable of announcing errors by sound. Sound output means (in this example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 44), and lamp 1 and lamp 2 are light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light (in this example, the second speaker shown in FIG. 45). 1 upper lamp 142a and second upper lamp 142b), which are one of the notification means. Also, the payout number display is payout display means (in this example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 42).

FIG. 45(a) and FIG. 46(a) are states in which the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in the AT game.

In this state, when the start lever 135 is pushed down, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating and the AT effect is executed. In the AT effect of this example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 includes a background display including a character image, etc., and an operation instruction display (first display, first game information) for instructing the player's operation. A display) SD and a total win number display (first display, second game information display) GD indicating the total number of medals won by the player are displayed.

Also, from the speaker (sound output means), background sound (BGM) corresponding to the AT production is output, and from the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), in a normal light emission mode corresponding to the AT production. emit light.

In FIGS. 45(b) and 46(b), a medal passing number error (second error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred during reel rotation, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during the rotation of the reels and is within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the number of medals passed error (second error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the first error display, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. and light is emitted from the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, background display and operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total winning number display (first display, second game information display) by liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 ) GD display, background sound output by the speaker (sound output means), and light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

According to this example, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error (in this example, the error in the number of medals passed). If the fraudulent person who attempted to commit the fraud causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error can make the fraudulent person feel uneasy and discourage the fraudulent act. Sometimes you can. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Also, the first effect means (in this example, the first upper lamp 142a) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) while executing the first effect in the first period. In this case, since the first effect is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is notified, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

In addition, the second effect means (in this example, the second upper lamp 142b) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) during execution of the second effect in the first period. In this case, since the second effect is not executed, there is a case where the clerk who is nearby can notice the occurrence of the error before the player calls the clerk of the game parlor, and the error must be dealt with quickly. can be done.

In addition, when the notification means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 and the speaker) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) during execution of the third effect during the first period. Since the third performance is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is reported, and the player's willingness to play is prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error. be able to.

Also, even if the first error display (in this example, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is applied) is executed, the first display (in this example, operation instruction display Since the player can visually recognize the SD and the total acquired number display GD), the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's willingness to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Also, the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) is detected while the sound output means (in this example, the speaker) is outputting a certain sound (in this example, background sound) during the first period. In this case, since the certain sound is continuously output, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

FIG. 45(c) and FIG. 46(c) show a state in which the second error notification is started, triggered by the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing number error (second error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal number error (second error). Execute the second error notification.

In the second error notification of this example, as the second error display, an opaque (non-transparent ) By displaying the background image, the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total number of wins display (first display, second game information display) GD are invisible. It becomes possible.

In this way, in the second period, the second error display causes the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total win number display (first display, second game information display) to be displayed. Display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved.

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error (in this example, the error in the number of medals passed) is resolved. During the period, the player can call the store clerk to solve the error.

In addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound is output from the speaker (sound output means). , the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E2 in this example) corresponding to the medal number error (second error).

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. During the period, the player can continue playing the game, and during the second period, the player can call the store clerk to deal with the error.

Also, the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) is detected while the sound output means (in this example, the speaker) is outputting a certain sound (in this example, background sound) during the first period. In this case, since the error sound is output without outputting the certain sound during the second period, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, but during the second period, By outputting an error sound, the player can call a store clerk at the game parlor to deal with the error.

FIG. 45(d) and FIG. 46(d) show the state in which the medal passing number error (second error) has been resolved and the error has been cancelled.

In the same state, the AT effect is resumed when the error is resolved. In the AT effect after the restart, the background display and the total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157, and the speaker (sound output means) is displayed. ) outputs a background sound corresponding to the AT effect, and the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) emit light in a normal light emission mode corresponding to the AT effect. Also, the payout number display 127 displays the number of payout medals (0 in this example) corresponding to the winning combination (Bell in this example).

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 2>
Next, a second embodiment of error display during reel rotation will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when a third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed.

Since the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 only in the types of errors that occur, description of other contents will be omitted.

47(b) and 48(b), a medal passing time error (third error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred during reel rotation, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during rotation of the reel and within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the medal passing time error (third error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the first error display, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. and light is emitted from the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, background display and operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total winning number display (first display, second game information display) by liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 ) GD display, background sound output by the speaker (sound output means), and light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

According to this example, the first error notification is a notification in which it is not possible to specify that the detected error is the second error (in this example, the medal passing time error), so that the gaming machine is notified of fraudulent activity. If the fraudulent person who attempted to commit the fraud causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error can make the fraudulent person feel uneasy and discourage the fraudulent act. Sometimes you can. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Also, the first effect means (in this example, the first upper lamp 142a) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) while executing the first effect in the first period. In this case, since the first effect is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is notified, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Also, the second effect means (in this example, the second upper lamp 142b) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) while executing the second effect in the first period. In this case, since the second effect is not executed, there is a case where the clerk who is nearby can notice the occurrence of the error before the player calls the clerk of the game parlor, and the error must be dealt with quickly. can be done.

In addition, when the notification means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 and the speaker) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) during execution of the third effect in the first period Since the third performance is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is reported, and the player's willingness to play is prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error. be able to.

Also, even if the first error display (in this example, a semi-transparent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is applied) is executed, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD Since the player can visually recognize the display of the total number of winnings (GD), the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's willingness to play is limited due to the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Further, the second error (medal passing time error in this example) is detected while the sound output means (speaker in this example) is outputting a certain sound (background sound in this example) during the first period. In this case, since the certain sound is continuously output, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

In addition, the occurrence of the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) and the third error (in this example, the medal passing time error) can be notified by the common (same mode) first error notification. can improve convenience.

FIG. 47(c) and FIG. 48(c) show a state in which the third error notification is started, triggered by the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing time error (third error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal passing time error (third error). Execute the third error notification.

In the third error notification of this example, as the third error display, an opaque (non-transparent ) By displaying the background image, the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total number of wins display (first display, second game information display) GD are invisible. It becomes possible.

In this way, in the second period, the third error display causes the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total winning number display (first display, second game information display). Display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed until the third error is resolved.

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the third error (in this example, the medal passing time error) is resolved. During the period, the player can call the store clerk to solve the error.

In addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound is output from the speaker (sound output means). , the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E3 in this example) corresponding to the medal passing time error (third error).

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. During the period, the player can continue playing the game, and during the second period, the player can call the store clerk to deal with the error.

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 3>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, a third embodiment of error display during reel rotation will be described.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when the fourth error occurs in a certain game and the fourth error display is executed. is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when error 1 occurs and a fourth error display is executed.

In this example, in order to avoid duplication of explanation, only the contents different from those in the first and second embodiments will be explained.

In FIGS. 49(b) and 50(b), a medal passing number error (fourth error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred during reel rotation, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during the rotation of the reels and within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the number of medals passed error (fourth error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the fourth error display, an opaque background image with a character string "selector error" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. , the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the display of the total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD become invisible. Further, the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) emits light in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, the output of the background sound by the speaker (sound output means) and the light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

FIG. 49(c) and FIG. 50(c) are states in which the second error notification is started, triggered by the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing number error (fourth error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal number error (fourth error). Execute the second error notification.

In the second error notification of this example, as the second error display, an opaque (transparent By overlapping and displaying the background image without ), operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD, total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD and the fourth error indication become invisible.

From the fourth error display, which is the first error notification, only the information that "a selector error has occurred" can be obtained, but from the second error display, which is the second error notification, " You can get the information "A medal passing error, which is one of the selector errors, has occurred."

That is, since the second error notification includes error notification with more detailed content than the first error notification, the second error notification provides detailed information about the error (for example, the location of the error, the cause of the error, etc.). , countermeasures, etc.) can be specified, and it is possible to respond appropriately to the error. In addition, after preparing for the occurrence of an error with the first error notification, it is possible to deal with the error with the second error notification, so it is possible to quickly respond to the error. Become.

In addition, in this example, the fourth error display and the second error display provide operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total win number display (first display, second display). Game information display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed after the occurrence of the fourth error until the fourth error is resolved.

According to this example, after the error occurs, the game cannot proceed until the fourth error (in this example, the error in the number of medals passed) is resolved. It is possible to call a store clerk and resolve the error.

In addition, in the second error notification, in addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emitting mode, and the speaker (sound output means) outputs an error sound, and the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E2 in this example) corresponding to the medal number error (fourth error).

According to this example, from the first period to the second period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. From the period to the second period, the player is asked to call the store clerk of the game shop, and the error can be quickly dealt with.

<Error display during reel rotation/Summary>
As described above, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 or the pachinko machine) includes notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 42 and the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 44). , 277, the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b shown in FIG. 45, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112, FIG. reels 110 to 112 shown in ), wherein the notification means detects a second error (e.g., medal number error) during a first period (e.g., one game period) When the first error notification (e.g., the first error notification shown in FIG. 45 (b)) can be executed, and the second error notification is performed in the second period after the first period (e.g., second error notification shown in FIG. 45(c)), wherein the first error notification is notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error, The gaming machine is characterized in that the second error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. When a person causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error may make the person uneasy and discourage the person from committing the fraudulent act. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Further, the first period is a period during which the game can proceed (for example, after the reels 110 to 112 start rotating by pressing the start lever 135, the reels 110 by the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 112 until the rotation stops).

With such a configuration, during the period of one game, an unidentifiable notification is given that the detected error is the second error. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, the first error notification is a notification indicating that an error has been detected (for example, ``an error has occurred'', ``anomaly has been detected'', ``please call a staff member'', ``cancel the error''). Please,” may be displayed or voiced.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk with the minimum necessary information.

Further, the notification means can execute the first error notification when a third error (for example, medal passing time error) is detected during the first period, and after the first period means capable of executing a third error notification during the second period of , and the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the third error (for example, FIG. 47(b)), and the third error notification is a notification that can specify that the detected error is the third error (for example, It may be the first error notification shown).

With such a configuration, the occurrence of the second error and the third error can be notified by the common (in the same mode) first error notification, and the convenience can be improved.

Further, the notification means is means including at least display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 42), and the first error notification indicates that the detected error is the second error. The first error notification is notification by an unspecified indication that the detected error is the third error, and the second error notification is an indication that the detected error is the third error. The error is reported by a display capable of specifying that the error is the second error, and the third error report is a report by a display capable of specifying that the detected error is the third error. may

With such a configuration, since the first error notification and the second error notification can be performed using the display means, the error can be noticed more reliably through vision.

In addition, the notification means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 44) and light emitting means (for example, first upper lamp 142a and second upper lamp 142b, side lamp 144, and stop button shown in FIG. 45). Illuminators 137a, 138a, 139a of each of 137-139, backlight of each of reels 110-112).

With such a configuration, the error can be more reliably noticed through hearing and sight.

Further, a first effect means capable of executing a first effect (for example, the first upper lamp 142a) is provided, and the first effect means is during the first period during the execution of the first effect. It may be means for continuously executing the first effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game even when the error is being reported, and the player's willingness to play can be prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error.

Further, a second effect means capable of executing a second effect (for example, a second upper lamp 142b) is provided, and the second effect means is during the second effect during the first period. It may be means for not executing the second effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, there is a case where a store clerk nearby can notice the occurrence of an error before the player calls the store clerk, and the error can be dealt with quickly.

Further, the notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157, the speaker) is a means capable of executing a third effect, and the notifying means is capable of executing the third effect during the first period. It may be means for continuing to execute the third effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game even when the error is being reported, and the player's willingness to play can be prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error.

Further, the notification means is means for not executing the third effect during the second period when the second error is detected while the third effect is being executed during the first period. may

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk of the game parlor by not executing the effect.

Further, when the second error is detected during the second period, the notification means executes the second error notification without going through the execution of the first error notification. may

With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly respond to the error by not performing the first error notification.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 42) includes notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 42, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 45, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112, and the reel 110 shown in FIG. 112), wherein the notifying means detects the first error notification (for example, the first error notification shown in FIG. 45(b)) can be executed, and a second error notification (for example, FIG. 45(c ) is a means capable of executing a second error notification shown in ), the first error notification is a notification that the detected error is the second error, and the second error notification The error notification is notification capable of specifying that the detected error is the second error, and the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification. It is a playground to play.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. When a person causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error may make the person uneasy and discourage the person from committing the fraudulent act. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk. Further, since the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification, after noticing the occurrence of the error by the first error notification, the error is dealt with according to the second error notification having a large amount of information. and respond quickly and appropriately to errors.

Further, the second error notification may be notification including the first error notification.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk with the minimum necessary information.

Also, the second error notification (for example, an opaque background image with a character string "selector error, number of medals passed error" shown in FIG. 49(c)) is the same as the first error notification (for example, More detailed content than the opaque (non-transparent) background image with the character string "selector error" shown in FIG. Identifiable content) may be included in the error notification.

With such a configuration, it is possible to specify the location of the error by the second error notification, and it is possible to appropriately deal with the error. In addition, after preparing for the occurrence of an error with the first error notification, it is possible to deal with the error with the second error notification, so it is possible to quickly respond to the error. Become. Also, the content of the corresponding error can be recognized at the timing when the store clerk of the game shop called by the player checks the game machine.

Further, the notification means executes the first error notification when a fourth error (for example, a door open error) is detected during the first period, and executes the first error notification after the first period. Only the first error notification may be continuously executed during the two periods.

With such a configuration, if the player wants to give priority to time, such as when the store is about to close, it may be possible to continue the game in the case of a minor error.

Further, the player can continue playing the game during the second period after the fourth error is detected during the first period, and the second error is detected during the first period. The player may not be able to continue playing the game during the second period of time.

With such a configuration, the game can be continued with respect to minor errors, and the degree of importance of the error can be notified to the player or the store clerk depending on whether or not the game can be continued. can be done.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 42) is a game machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means First display (for example, operation instruction display SD and total number of wins display GD shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 47(a), display of set number of AT, display of initial game number of AT, AT additional game number, display of the number of executions of operation navigation, display of points and items acquired by the player, display of the number of game media paid out), and the first display is game information. The display means is a first error display (for example, a translucent display with a character string "An error has occurred" shown in FIGS. 45(b) and 47(b). background image), and the first error display means that the second error (for example, the number of medals passed or the number of medals passed) is displayed during the first period (for example, the period of one game). display executed when the error is detected, and when the second error is detected while the display means is executing the first display during the first period, the first error display is executed The game machine is characterized in that the player can visually recognize the first display even if the game is played.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed, the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error.

Note that "a player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed" means that at least a part of the first display is visible. A case in which at least part of one error display overlaps at least part of the first display is also included.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 42) is a game machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means First display (for example, operation instruction display SD and total number of wins display GD shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 47(a), display of set number of AT, display of initial game number of AT, AT additional game number, display of the number of executions of operation navigation, display of points and items acquired by the player, display of the number of game media paid out), and the first display is game information. The display means is a first error display (for example, a translucent display with a character string "An error has occurred" shown in FIGS. 45(b) and 47(b). background image), and the first error display means that the second error (for example, the number of medals passed or the number of medals passed) is displayed during the first period (for example, the period of one game). The first error display is performed when the second error is detected while the display means is performing the first display during the first period. that the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first display is made, and the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved in the second period after the first period. It is a game table characterized by

It should be noted that ``during the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved'' means that the first display overlaps the error display, etc. In addition to the case where it is displayed and the game cannot proceed, the case where all the display areas of the display means are overlapped with an error display etc. and the game cannot proceed, or alternatively (or in addition) , when the operation of the operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139) becomes invalid and the game cannot proceed, when an error sound is output from the sound output means and the game cannot proceed, or when the light emitting means This also includes the case where light is emitted to indicate an error and the game cannot proceed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed, the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error. Also, during the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved. It is possible to eliminate the error.

Also, the first display may be invisible during a second period after the first period.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, and the player can call the game parlor clerk during the second period to deal with the error. .

Also, the first period may be a period during which a game can proceed.

With such a configuration, at least the game can be continued, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the occurrence of an error.

Further, the game information may be information that instructs the operation of the player.

With such a configuration, the game can be continued based on the game information, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the occurrence of an error.

Further, the first error display is a display having transparency, and the above-mentioned "a player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed" The first error indication may overlap the first indication.

With such a configuration, while the first error notification is displayed in front, the player can visually recognize the first display in the back, so that the player can play the game even under the condition that the error occurs. The game can be continued, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error.

In addition, the display means can display a second error display (for example, an opaque background image with a character string "Error in the number of medals passed" shown in Figs. 45(c) and 47(c)). and the second error display is non-transparent display, and the second error is detected while the display means is performing the first display during the first period. , the second error display is executed without executing the first error display during the second period, and the above-mentioned "the first display becomes invisible" means that the first The display may be overlapped with the second error display.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, but during the second period, the second error display is overlapped before the first display. By doing so, the first display becomes invisible, so that the player can call the store clerk of the game parlor to deal with the error.

Further, sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277) are provided, the sound output means is means capable of outputting a certain sound (for example, background sound), and the sound output means is capable of outputting during the first period When the second error is detected while the certain sound is being output, the certain sound may be continuously output.

With such a configuration, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited by the occurrence of the error. can.

Further, the sound output means is means capable of outputting an error sound, and when the second error is detected while the sound output means is outputting the certain sound during the first period, the The error sound may be output without outputting the certain sound during the second period.

With such a configuration, while the player can continue playing the game during the first period, an error sound is output during the second period, thereby discouraging the player from playing the game parlor. You can call us and deal with the error.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first period" and the "second period" according to the present invention are not limited to consecutive periods. When that has elapsed (eg, after 3 seconds have passed since the reels 110-112 have stopped), a second time period may begin.

In addition, the start timing of the second period is not particularly limited, but when game media are to be paid out, a second error notification is sent before paying out in order to prevent fraudulent payouts by fraudulent players. preferably.

In addition, the "notification indicating that an error has been detected" is not limited to display notification (in this example, the display of "an error has occurred"), notification by sound, notification by light emission, notification by movement of the movable body It may be a notification or the like.

Also, "the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification" means, for example, that there are multiple types of errors classified into multiple categories (insertion error, payout error, winning error, etc.). In this case, in the first error notification, only the error category (e.g., payout error) is notified, and in the second error report, the error category and name (e.g., payout error: medal payout error 1) are notified. case is included.

Also, for example, in the first error notification, only the name of the error (for example, medal payout error 1) is notified, and in the second error report, the error name and cancellation method (for example, medal payout error 1: remove medals , please operate the error release switch).

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which the game balls enclosed in the game machine are circulated. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the game machine (slot machine in this example) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are subjected to a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, described later). When a start lever operation) is received, rotation is started, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, operation by a stop button described later), the propriety of internal winning of multiple types of hands is determined by lottery. Then, each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop. This game machine advances a series of games in which if a predetermined payout condition is met, game media are paid out and the game is terminated, and if the game is not met, the game is terminated without paying out the game media.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. FIG. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 51 to 55 are used only for the explanation of this embodiment. 51 to 55 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 51 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals from a medal payout device (not shown) (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket).

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the whole of the display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Refill production / overview>
Next, an overview of the “refill effect” that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (slot machine in this example) provides a first grant effect for granting a privilege, and the first grant effect in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed. A second giving effect (refilling effect) of giving the same kind of privilege as the given privilege can be executed. In addition, in the first giving effect and the second giving effect, it is possible to display the privilege display regarding the privilege given to the player.

Here, the "privilege" according to the present invention means a profit advantageous to the player, such as points, items, bonuses, AT, addition of AT games, mini games, payout of game media (medals), Operation navigation, internal winning of prizes, prize winning, special effects, etc. correspond to this. In addition, the "privilege display" according to the present invention is a display related to a privilege granted to a player, for example, a display including points, a display including items, and an operation navigation suggesting an operation mode of operation means. This includes a display including the number of operation instructions indicating the number of executions, a display announcing an AT-additional game, a display announcing the provision of a bonus, and the like.

Examples of the "display including points" include a display including numbers and character strings such as "+10" indicating the number of points given, and a display including numbers and character strings such as "0010/1000" indicating the number of accumulated points. This applies to indications that include In addition, the "display including items" includes, for example, a display including an image showing the given item (for example, an image imitating the appearance of fruits such as bananas, apples, grapes, etc.), and a display including characters indicating the given item. (For example, a display including a character string such as "banana", "apple", "grape", etc.). Further, as the "operation navigation suggesting the operation mode of the operation means", for example, symbols or character strings such as "←", "right center left", "321" suggesting reverse pressing of the stop buttons 137 to 139. For example, "15 times", "●● (* represents 2 times)", etc. Indications including are applicable.

<Refill production / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, Example 1 of the “refill effect” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

In this example, in the point specialization state production, the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) are executed, and the same type of privilege is performed in the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) (in this example, bananas of the first value).

Here, the point-specific state effect is a progress effect that may progress for each game, and in this example, is continuously executed over a plurality of games (at least 10 games), and This is an effect in which items are always given in the game. In addition, the "progress effect" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may not be continuous games (may be discontinuous games), and items may not be awarded in any game. It can be.

FIG. 52(a) is a diagram showing items given in the special point state rendering and the points corresponding to each item.

The item in this example is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of points (values). Also, in this example, there are a plurality of types of groups, and one type of group, "banana", is a group (item) to which points (values) of 10, 20, or 30 are given. Another type of group, “apples,” is a group (item) to which points (values) of 30, 40, or 50 are given. is a group (item) to which either 100, 200 or 300 points (value) are given.

The points (second value) that can be given by the item "grape" in this example are either 100, 200, or 300, and any of the points that can be given by the item "apple" (first points of value greater than 30, 40, or 50, which is the value). Needless to say, the type and number of items (groups) and the type and number of points given by each item (group) are not limited to this example.

FIG. 52(b) is a diagram showing an example of the first addition effect in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 52(b)(1) is a state in which the point specializing state effect has been started in N (N is a positive integer) game, and before the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted. .

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display suggesting the number of remaining games for the effect (in this example, a display including the character string “remaining 10G”) and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string “0000/1000”) display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52(b)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N game.

In this example, N games are started with the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135, and since one game has been completed, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is changed from "remaining 10 G". It is updated to "Remaining 9G".

Also, since the item (privilege) "banana" was granted in the N game, a privilege display SP1 (in this example, displaying an image imitating the appearance of a banana) suggests the item (privilege) granted to the player. running

The method of selecting one item from a plurality of types of items is not particularly limited. You can select items.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52(b)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N game.

In this example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ends the N game, so the privilege display suggests points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "banana" given to the player. SP2 (in this example, a display including a character string of "+10" suggesting that 10 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 10 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0000/1000" to "0010/1000".

In addition, in this example, when the number of points acquired by the player reaches 1000, in the performance (judgment performance) for judging whether or not to shift to AT, so that it is easy to shift to AT (If you win the AT lottery, to make it easier).

The method of selecting one point from a plurality of types of points included in the item is not particularly limited. For example, one point may be selected by lottery. A point may be selected based on

FIG. 52(c) is a diagram showing an example of the second addition effect (refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 52(c)(1) is a state in which the point specializing state effect is continued in the N+1 game, and before the depression operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "9 G left"), and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0010/1000"). display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52(c)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+1 game.

In this example, the N+1 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 as a trigger, and one game is completed, but in the game in which the second giving effect (replacement effect) is executed, the progress effect is not allowed to progress. Therefore, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is not updated, and remains as "remaining 9G".

According to this example, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the second grant effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, the N+1 game executes a second grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (item "banana" in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game). Since it is a game, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a second giving effect (refill effect), and is given to the player. The privilege display SP1 suggesting the item (privilege) "banana" (in this example, the display of an image simulating the appearance of a banana) is executed.

Note that the effect suggestion display RD is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a display such as "KEEP" or "LOCK" that suggests that the progress effect is not to proceed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52(c)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+1 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+1 game is completed with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, the points (privileges) corresponding to the items (privileges) given to the player ) (in this example, a display including a character string “+10” indicating that 10 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 10 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0010/1000" to "0020/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the benefit granted in the first grant effect can be executed. Even in the game immediately after executing the first giving performance, the player's expectation for the privilege can be heightened, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained from the first giving performance to the second giving performance. be able to.

In addition, in the second grant effect, in order to grant the privilege of the same value as the privilege granted in the first grant performance, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is granted in the second grant performance, and the game It is possible to give the player a sense of security and prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

FIG. 52(c3′) shows a case where the same item “banana” as in the first imparting effect is imparted in the second imparting effect, but points (30 points) different from those in the first imparting effect are imparted. It is the figure which showed the example of.

In this example, a privilege display SP3 that suggests points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "banana" granted to the player (in this example, the characters "+30" suggesting that 30 points have been granted) column) is executed, and since 30 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player is updated from "0010/1000" to "0040/1000".

According to this example, the privilege is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of values, and the same group is selected again in the second giving effect, so if the value of the privilege given in the first giving effect is low Even so, in the second giving effect, the player can have a feeling of anticipation that a privilege with a greater value than that in the first giving effect may be given.

<Refill production / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, Example 2 of the “refill effect” that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

In this example, in the point specialization state production, the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) are executed, and the same type of privilege is performed in the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) (In this example, the second value item "grape" which is higher in value than the first value item "banana") is given.

FIG. 53(a) is a diagram showing an example of the first imparting effect in the point specializing state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 53(a)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect has been started in the N+2 game and before the depression operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string “9G left”) and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string “0020/1000”). display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 53(a)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+2 game.

In this example, N+2 games are started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135, and since one game has been completed, the display suggesting the number of remaining games of the point specialization state effect is changed from "remaining 9G". It is updated to "Remaining 8G".

In addition, since the item (privilege) "grape" was granted in the N game, a privilege display SP4 (in this example, an image imitating the appearance of the grape) suggesting the item (privilege) "grape" granted to the player display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 53(a)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+2 game.

In this example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ended the N+2 game, so the privilege display suggesting points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "grape" given to the player. SP5 (in this example, a display including a character string of "+100" suggesting that 100 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 100 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0020/1000" to "0120/1000".

FIG. 53(b) is a diagram showing an example of the second addition effect (refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 53(b)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect is continued in the N+3 game, and before the depression operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "remaining 8G") and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0120/1000") ) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 53(b)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+3 game.

In this example, the N+3 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 as a trigger, and one game is completed, but in the game in which the second giving effect (replacement effect) is executed, the progress effect is not allowed to progress. Therefore, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is not updated, and is left as "remaining 8G".

According to this example, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the second grant effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, the N+3 game is a game that executes a second grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (the item “grape” in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game). Therefore, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a second giving effect (refill effect), and the effect given to the player A privilege display SP4 suggesting the item (privilege) "grape" (in this example, displaying an image imitating the appearance of a grape) is executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 53(b)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+3 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+3 game is ended with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, A privilege display SP5 suggesting points (privileges) (in this example, a display including a character string "+100" suggesting that 100 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 100 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0120/1000" to "0220/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the second benefit granted in the first grant effect is executed. Therefore, in the game immediately after executing the first imparting effect, the player's expectation for the second privilege, which is a value greater than the first value, can be increased, and the first imparting effect can be changed to the second privilege. The player's desire to play can be maintained over the two giving performances.

In addition, in the second grant effect, in order to grant the privilege of the same value as the privilege granted in the first grant performance, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is granted in the second grant performance, and the game It is possible to give the player a sense of security and prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

FIG. 53(c) is a diagram showing an example of the third addition effect (refill effect of refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 53(c)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect is continued in the N+4 game, and before the depression operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "8G remaining") and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0220/1000"). display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 53(c)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+4 game.

In this example, the N+4 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135, and one game is completed. Since the progress is not made, the display suggesting the number of remaining games of the point specialization state effect is not updated, and remains as "remaining 8G".

According to this example, in the game in which the third imparting effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the third imparting effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In this example, an example is shown in which the progress effect is not progressed in the third grant effect. It may be configured to advance the progress effect in the refill effect of the effect).

In addition, in the N+4 game, a third grant effect (refill effect of refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (item “grape” in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game) is performed. Since it is a game to be executed, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string of "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a third giving effect (refill effect of refill effect), A privilege display SP4 (in this example, the display of an image imitating the appearance of grapes) that suggests the item (privilege) granted to the player is executed.

In addition, the display mode of the effect suggesting display suggesting the third imparting effect and the effect suggesting effect display suggesting the second imparting effect may be different. ), a display including a character string of "Refill! Refill!" may be executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 53(c)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+4 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+4 game is ended with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, A privilege display SP6 suggesting points (privileges) (in this example, a display including a character string "+300" suggesting that 300 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 300 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0220/1000" to "0520/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the third grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the benefit granted in the second grant effect can be executed. Even in the game immediately after executing the second giving performance, the player's expectation for the privilege can be heightened, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained from the second giving performance to the third giving performance. be able to.

In addition, the privilege is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of values, and the same group is selected again in the third giving effect, so even if the value of the privilege given in the first giving effect is low In the third giving performance, the player can have a sense of anticipation that a privilege with a greater value than that in the first giving performance may be given.

<Refill production / summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 51) is a gaming machine equipped with display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157). A first giving effect (for example, FIG. 52 (b) (1) to the same figure that gives one of the types of benefits (for example, 10 points for the item “banana” shown in FIG. 52 (a)) (b) First giving effect shown in (3)) can be executed, and the display means displays a privilege related to the privilege given to the player (for example, in FIG. 52 (b) (2) and a privilege display SP2 shown in FIG. 52(b)(3), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a privilege display SP1 shown in FIG. A second grant effect (for example, FIG. 52 (c) (1) to FIG. 52 (c) that grants the same type of benefit (for example, 10 points for the item “banana”) as the benefit granted in one grant effect It is a game machine characterized in that it is a means capable of executing (2nd given effect shown in (3)).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, in the game following the game in which the first giving effect is executed, the second giving effect to give the same kind of privilege as the privilege given in the first giving effect can be executed, even in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's expectation is increased from the first grant effect to the second grant effect. It is possible to maintain the desire to play.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 51) is a gaming machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means displays a plurality of types of benefits. First giving effect (for example, FIG. 53 (a) (1) to (a) ( 3) is means capable of executing the first giving effect shown in FIG. , privilege display SP5 shown in FIGS. 53(a) and (3)), and the privilege is a first type of privilege (for example, an item shown in FIG. 52(a)), which is a first value 10 points for "banana") and a second type of privilege that is a second value greater than the first value (for example, 100 points for the item "grape" shown in FIG. 52(a)), The display means provides the same type of privilege (for example, 100 points of the item “grape”) as the privilege given in the first giving effect in the game subsequent to the game in which the first giving effect is executed. A game machine characterized by being a means capable of executing a second grant effect (for example, the second grant effect shown in FIGS. 53 (b) (1) to (b) (3)). be.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second benefit of the same type as the second benefit granted in the first grant effect is granted. can be executed, the player's expectation for the second privilege, which is a value greater than the first value, can be increased in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed. It is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play from the provision performance of 1 to the second provision performance.

In addition, the display means, in the game subsequent to the game in which the second imparting effect is executed, the privilege of the same type as the privilege imparted in the second imparting effect (for example, 300 points of the item "grape") 53(c)(1) to FIG. 53(c)(3)).

With such a configuration, in the game subsequent to the game in which the second imparting effect is executed, the third imparting effect of imparting the same type of privilege as the privilege imparted in the second imparting effect can be executed. Therefore, even in the game immediately after the execution of the second giving effect, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's willingness to play is increased from the second giving effect to the third giving effect. can be sustained.

Moreover, said 1st provision production|presentation may be the production|presentation which always provides the said privilege.

With such a configuration, the player will not be discouraged even if the second imparting effect is executed after the first imparting effect.

Further, the display means is a means capable of executing a progress effect that may progress for each game (for example, a point specialization state effect shown in FIGS. 52 and 53), and the second imparting effect is executed. In the game, the progress effect may not progress.

With such a configuration, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the chances of granting the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so the second grant effect is executed. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game will be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

Further, the display means is a means capable of executing the second giving effect in the next game when the power is restored before the game next to the game in which the first giving effect was executed is started. may be

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to a player who has started a game when the amusement arcade opens.

Further, the privilege is composed of a group (for example, item "banana", "apple", or "grape") consisting of a plurality of types of values (for example, three types of points), and the above-mentioned "first The "same type as the privilege given in the giving effect" may refer to one type of group selected again from among the plurality of types of groups.

With such a configuration, even when the value of the privilege given in the first giving performance is low, the second giving performance gives a privilege with a greater value than the first giving performance. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that it may be possible.

Moreover, said 2nd provision production|presentation may be production|presentation which provides the said privilege of the same value (for example, point) as the said privilege provided by said 1st provision production|presentation.

With such a configuration, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is given even in the second giving performance, so that the player can be given a sense of security and the player's willingness to play can be reduced. can be prevented from occurring.

Further, the privilege may include points, and the privilege display may be a display including the points (for example, privilege display SP2 shown in FIG. 52(b)(3)).

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first giving effect, the player's expectation for re-giving points can be increased, and the first giving effect can be changed to the second giving effect. It is possible to keep the player's desire to play for a long time.

Further, the privilege may include an item, and the privilege display may be a display including the item (for example, privilege display SP1 shown in FIG. 52(b)(2)).

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first grant effect, the player's expectation for re-delivery of the item can be heightened, and the first grant effect can be changed to the second grant effect. It is possible to keep the player's desire to play for a long time.

Further, an operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 51) is provided, the privilege includes operation navigation suggesting an operation mode of the operation means, and the privilege display indicates the number of times the operation navigation is performed. The display may include the number of operation instructions to be displayed.

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first imparting effect, the player's expectation for the operation navigation can be increased, and from the first imparting effect to the second imparting effect, It is possible to keep the player's desire to play.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "privileges" according to the present invention are not limited to items or points, and include, for example, bonuses, ATs, AT game additions, mini games, game media (medal) payouts, operation navigation, inside prizes Winning, winning a prize, special performance, or the like may be used.

In addition, the "privilege display" according to the present invention may be a display related to benefits, such as a display that foretells that a privilege will be granted, or a false notice that a privilege will be granted (a false notice that does not actually grant a privilege). Alternatively, a display (tutorial display) or the like explaining the content of the privilege may be used.

In addition, the "progress effect" according to the present invention is not limited to a point-specific effect, and may be, for example, a game section effect in which the number of AT-added games can be obtained, or a special winning role can be won. It may be a production of a game section or the like.

Also, the "value" according to the present invention is not limited to points, and may be, for example, the ease of transitioning to an advantageous state, the number of game media paid out, the winning percentage of mini games, and the like.

<Disbursement after power outage / overview>
Next, an overview of "payout after power failure and power recovery" that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

A gaming machine (slot machine in this example) according to the present embodiment includes payout means capable of executing payout of game media, and sound output means capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the game media. Further, the payout means is capable of executing the rest of the payout when power is restored during execution of the payout of game media, and the sound output means is capable of executing the rest of the payout by the payout means. is configured so as not to output the payout sound. Further, the sound output means is capable of outputting a background sound, and is configured not to output the background sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means.

Here, the "payout means" according to the present invention means a means capable of paying out game media (for example, medals). Apparatus, etc. fall under this category. The "sound output means" is a means capable of outputting sound such as payout sound and background sound, and corresponds to, for example, a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 51, a musical instrument, and the like.

The “payout sound” corresponds to, for example, a sound effect such as “charin” that is output in accordance with the payout of game media, or a voice such as “medals are being paid out”. Also, the "background sound" corresponds to, for example, BGM that is output together with effects using lamps or the like, effect sounds for livening up the game, and the like.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes display means capable of displaying a return display after power is turned on, and a period during which the return display is displayed by the display means is a silent period during which no sound is output by the sound output means. , the payout means executes the remainder of the payout in the silent period.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention is means capable of displaying a return display after power-on, and corresponds to, for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 or the like. Further, the "recovery display" according to the present invention is a display suggesting that it is a period (recovering) from after power is restored to the slot machine to when the normal game can be started. This includes a display including character strings such as "medium" and "please wait for a while", and a display in which the entire display area is set to a certain color (for example, black or white).

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment includes payout display means capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out, and the payout display means displays the payout amount during execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means. Execute the display of the number of payouts.

Here, the 'payout display means' according to the present invention is a means capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out. . Note that the payout display means is not limited to the 7-segment (SEG) display, and may be other display means such as a liquid crystal display device.

<Payment after power failure / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, Example 1 of “payout after power failure and power recovery” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payouts before and after power interruption/recovery of the slot machine.

Here, the "display device" in the figure is display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157), the "speaker" is sound output means, and the lamp is light output means capable of outputting light ( In this example, it is a side lamp (decorative lamp) 144) shown in FIG. The payout number display is payout display means (in this example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 51), and the payout device is payout means (payout device not shown in this example).

Before the power failure shown in FIG. 54(b), the slot machine 100 is normally energized.

In this example, before the settlement button 134 is pressed, a background display is displayed on the display device, a background sound is output from the speaker, and light is output from the lamp in a normal light emission mode. Further, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the display for the number of tokens to be paid out, and since medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is non-payout.

The state shown in FIG. 54(a) is a state in which an operation to press the settlement button 134 is accepted during a game, and payout of betted medals is started. This state may be a state in which a winning combination is won in a certain game, a third stop operation is accepted, and payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is started.

In this example, the state of the payout device is changed from the non-payout state to the payout state when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, and the payout device starts to pay out the medals, and the payout device also pays out the medals. During the period, a sound to be played (for example, a sound effect of "charin") is output from the speaker.

In addition, the number of payout display device displays the number by subtracting 1 in the order of 50→49→48→47→... each time one medal is paid out by the payout device.

It should be noted that the background display by the display device, the background sound output by the speaker, and the light output in the normal light emission mode by the lamp are all continued during the medal payout period.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 54(b) is a state in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which power supply to the slot machine 100 is interrupted).

In this state, since the power supply to various devices is stopped, background display by the display device, background sound output by the speaker, light output in the normal light emission mode by the lamp, payout number display by the payout number indicator, and payout The payout of medals by the device will be in a state where none are executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 54(c) is the power recovery state (the power supply to the slot machine 100 is restarted).

In this example, when the power is restored, the return display is started on the display device, and the display period of the return display is a silent period during which no sound is output from the speaker.

In addition, during this silent period, the rest of the payout (in this example, the payout of the remaining 46 medals) is executed by the payout device, and the number of payout display is displayed each time one medal is paid out by the payout device. , 46->45->...3->2->1. After the payout of all medals is completed, the state of the payout device is changed from the payout state to the non-payout state, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number 0 is displayed on the payout number display.

According to this example, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout means by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound and the background sound, it is possible to check whether the payout means is operating normally outside business hours. To easily confirm whether or not a player is wrong by an operation sound, and to prevent a fraudulent act by allowing a store clerk of a game parlor to notice the occurrence of fraudulent payout by a fraudulent person during business hours. becomes possible.

In addition, since the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed by the payout number indicator, the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

In addition, as in the case of a power failure and power recovery, even after the power is turned on, the operating sound of the payout means can be confirmed in a silent state. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 54(d) is a state in which the game can be started after power is restored.

In this example, when it becomes possible to start a game after the power is restored, instead of the return display by the display device, the background display before the power failure is resumed, the background sound is output by the speaker, and the normal sound is generated by the lamp. By restarting the output of the light in the light emission mode, the state before the power failure is restored.

<Payment after power failure / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, Example 2 of “payout after power failure and power recovery” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payout and error notification before and after power interruption/recovery of the slot machine. The states shown in FIGS. 54(a) to 54(c) are the same as those shown in FIGS.

In this example, in addition to the contents of the first embodiment described using FIG. device) may output an error sound during the remaining execution of the payout.

Errors that can occur in the slot machine 100 include door open errors, hopper empty errors, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM errors, winning errors, and the like.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. A hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number, and the prescribed number of medals or more is delivered to the hopper. Resolved by supplementing.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are accumulated, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number, and can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing. This occurs when the path does not pass normally, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and medal payout error 3 occurs. occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and both are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. .

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box is turned on, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when an operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is canceled when the operation of the error release switch is accepted.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, but can also be applied to a pachinko machine. Errors that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

The state shown in FIG. 55(e) is a state in which an error is detected during recovery display after power recovery.

In this example, since a door open error or a hopper empty error was detected during recovery display after power restoration, instead of recovery display, an error display is performed on the display device, an error sound is output from the speaker, and a lamp is displayed. is outputting light in an error light emission mode.

Even when an error is detected, the payout of medals by the payout device and the display of the number of payouts by the payout number display are both continued.

The mode of error display by the display device is not particularly limited, but for example, an error display that notifies the content of the error by a character string (for example, a character string such as "Door open error occurred!", "Hopper empty error occurred!" error display), error display prompting error resolution (for example, display including a character string such as "Please call a clerk"), and error display showing an error with a still image or video.

In addition, the mode of the error sound by the speaker is not particularly limited. This includes an error sound (for example, a voice or warning sound such as "Please call the store clerk") that prompts to eliminate the problem.

In addition, the error light emission mode of the lamp is not particularly limited. , the lighting of an error-dedicated lamp, etc.

According to this example, the operation sound of the payout means not accompanied by the payout sound overlaps with the output timing of the error sound, so that the game store clerk more reliably notices that the fraudulent payout has occurred. becomes possible.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 55(f) is a state in which the cause of the error has been resolved and the error has been cancelled.

In this example, the error display by the display device, the output of the error sound by the speaker, and the output of the light in the error light emission mode by the lamp are all stopped, while the recovery display is resumed on the display device.

<Payment/Summary after Power Outage/Restoration>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 51) includes a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out game media (for example, medals), A game machine provided with sound output means (e.g., a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the medium, wherein the payout means is powered off and restored during the payout of the game medium. the sound output means does not output the payout sound while the payout means is executing the rest of the payout (while the payout means is operating) The gaming machine is characterized in that it is a means for not outputting an audio signal of a sound, or temporarily blocking (muting) the audio signal of a payout sound while outputting the audio signal.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound, the clerk of the game parlor can confirm that the payout means operates normally outside business hours. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that the illegal payout has been made by the fraudulent person, thereby preventing the fraudulent act. It becomes possible to

Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 51) according to the present embodiment includes a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of executing payout of game media (for example, medals), and a game medium payout unit. and a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound (for example, a sound effect of "charin") during a period, wherein the payout means is during the payout of the game medium. means for executing the rest of the payout in the event of a power failure and power recovery, and the sound output means outputs the payout sound while the rest of the payout is being performed by the payout means (while the payout means is operating). Means that does not output (for example, does not output the sound signal of the payout sound, temporarily blocks (mutes) the sound signal while outputting the sound signal), and the sound output means is an error (for example, , a door open error for informing the opening of the door of the game table, and a hopper empty error for payout), and the sound output means is capable of outputting an error sound for announcing the payout by the payout means during the rest of the payout. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is means for outputting the error sound.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound, the clerk of the game parlor can confirm that the payout means operates normally outside business hours. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that the illegal payout has been made by the fraudulent person, thereby preventing the fraudulent act. It becomes possible to In addition, by overlapping the output timing of the error sound with the operation sound of the payout means that is not accompanied by the payout sound, it is possible for the store clerk to more reliably notice that the fraudulent payout has occurred. Become.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting background sound (for example, BGM), and the sound output means does not output the background sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means (for example, Means for not outputting the audio signal of the background sound or temporarily blocking (muting) the audio signal of the background sound while outputting the audio signal of the background sound may be used.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without background sound, so that the staff of the game parlor can check whether the payout means is operating normally outside business hours. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that an illegal payout has been made by a fraudulent person, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. It becomes possible.

Further, display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying a return display after power-on is provided, and during the display period of the return display by the display means, no sound is output by the sound output means (for example, no sound is output). a silent period (for example, a silent period shown in FIGS. 54 and 55) in which no audio signal is output, or in which the audio signal is temporarily cut off (muted) while the audio signal is output, and the payout means , means for executing the remainder of said payout in said silent period.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout means by the payout means in a silent state after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is in operation by the operation sound.

Further, a payout display means (e.g., a payout number display device) capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out is provided, and the payout display means displays the payout amount during execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means. It may be a means for executing the display of the number of payouts.

With such a configuration, the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed, so the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

Further, the error may be a door open error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine.

With such a configuration, even if power is restored by a fraudulent person during business hours, the door open error sound may alert the store clerk of the fraudulent act.

Also, the error may be a payout error related to the payout.

With such a configuration, the store clerk can check both the operation of payout and the operation of error detection outside business hours, thereby enhancing convenience.

Further, a main control section and a sub-control section may be provided, the main control section may control the payout means and the payout display means, and the sub-control section may control the display means. good.

With such a configuration, when the recovery time of the main control unit is earlier than that of the sub-control unit after power failure or after power is turned on, the payout of game media and the display of the number of payouts can be started with priority. is possible, the game media can be paid out quickly, and the convenience can be improved.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, errors that can be notified by the sound output means are not limited to door open errors and hopper empty errors, but medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM defects, prize winning errors, and the like. It can be. Also, the payout error related to payout is not limited to the hopper empty error, and may be, for example, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, or the like.

Further, the "silent period" according to the present invention may be a period in which no sound is output by the sound output means. It may be a period during which it is cut off (muted).

Further, the "payout number display" according to the present invention is not limited to subtraction display (eg 50→49→...), and may be addition display (eg 1→2→...).

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which the game balls enclosed in the game machine are circulated. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the basic embodiment described below, a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. At the same time, based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation to individually rotate. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. This is a game machine that progresses a series of games ending without paying out game media.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. FIG. 56 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 56 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Prepare. Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the basic embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at regular intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 57, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) are displayed on the left reel upper row symbols and the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol. The bottom symbol of the middle reel, the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the drawing) is the top symbol of the right reel, and the right reel 112 is the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure). The symbols displayed on the middle row and the bottom row of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 shown in the figure) are called the right reel bottom row symbols, respectively, and the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed on the reels 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three of each are displayed in the vertical direction, and a total of nine are displayed. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the basic embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

Backlights for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 110 to 112 . It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the gap. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, is displayed. Only one middle prize line L1 composed of reel middle symbols is provided. FIG. 57 shows this winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 56 requires three medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than three, none of the winning lines become valid. validate. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the rising right pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines. Incidentally, the area on the winning line L1 (the area consisting of numbers 2, 5 and 8 in FIG. 57) may be referred to as an active line area S1. Also, the area other than the effective line area S1 of the pattern display window 113 (area consisting of numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 and 9 in FIG. 57) may be referred to as a non-effective line area S2.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1, a special combination 2) has been internally elected in an internal lottery to be described later, or a special combination internal winning state or special game to be described later. It is a lamp that informs the player of the status. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 and 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In the basic embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed (upper limit is three). The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The chance button 190 is a button for presentation.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 and 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. In the basic embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139. As shown in FIG. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player. These stop buttons 137 to 139 correspond to an example of stop operation means.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 58) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged above the front door 102. Above the production device 160, the sound of a speaker 272 (see FIG. 58) provided inside the slot machine 100 is output to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the basic embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it could also be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in the basic embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that the effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of effect executing means.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited. It should be noted that the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game execution means, advantageous interval setting means, and state setting means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interrupt is 256×47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal reception sensor for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. , start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, optical sensors for reels 110-112 (index sensor 80), etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor and a bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 and 132, respectively, and an insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. to detect The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor (index sensor 80) of the reels 110 to 112 is installed at a predetermined position on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece (detection piece 50) provided on the reel frame passes, L become a level. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129, the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display device 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. A low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped if the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in the basic embodiment).

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight 94, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in the basic embodiment) of a plurality of types (10 in the basic embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the basic embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell pattern", and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "seven 1 Designs” are arranged respectively.

The slot machine 100 in the basic embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum withdrawal range (less than 5 frames in the basic embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to improve the amusement of the game. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination 1, replay combinations 1-2, and small combinations 1-6. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in the basic embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player by winning. Further, replay combinations 1 and 2 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These special roles 1 and 2 and replay roles 1 and 2 may be called "operating roles". In addition, the "winning" in the basic embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not involve the payout of medals (does not involve the payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning of replay hands 1 and 2 is included. The special role 1 is a special role that is carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning, and the other roles are general roles that are not carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning. be.

The special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (RT2) by winning a prize. However, medals will not be paid out due to winning these roles themselves. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for special role 1. In the following description, the special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1" or "BB".

When the special combination 1 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won special combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination internal winning state (RT1). This flag is maintained in the on state until the corresponding working role is won, and it becomes a state in which it is easy to win these working roles in the next and subsequent games. Specifically, even if the special role 1 is not won in the game in which the special role 1 is internally won, the same state as the special role 1 is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combinations are all won. becomes easier.

The special role internally elected state will be described in detail later, but in the special role internally elected state, if a role other than the special role is internally elected, the symbols constituting the other role are arranged preferentially. , reel stop control is executed.

The re-playing hands 1 and 2 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be executed again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted coins. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay" for replay combination 1 and "replay-replay-watermelon" for replay combination 2. Among the replay hands, the replay hand 1 may be referred to as "normal replay" and the replay hand 2 may be referred to as "chance replay".

The replay hands 1 and 2 may be hands that allow the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, if you win a replay, the insertion of medals in the next game may be automatically inserted (reset the number of inserted medals in the memory area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308). The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small combinations 1 to 6 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "ANY-Cherry-ANY" for the small combination 1, "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" for the small combination 2, and "Bell-Bell-Bell" for the small combination 3. 4 is "Replay-Bell-Bell", the small winning combination 5 is "Bell-Replay-Bell", and the small winning combination 6 is "Bell-Bell-Replay". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG.

Among the above small roles, the small role 1 is "cherry", the small role 2 is "watermelon", the small role 3 is "bell", the small role 4 is "left bell", the small role 5 is "middle bell", and the small role 6 is sometimes referred to as the "right bell". In the case of "ANY-Cherry-ANY", the middle reel middle pattern of the middle reel 111 may be "Cherry", and the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may have any pattern.

Here, the small winning combination 3 (bell) is a winning combination regardless of the order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139, but the small winning combination 4 (left bell) and the small winning combination 5 (middle bell). And a small winning combination 6 (left bell) wins when the order of stop operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 matches a predetermined order of stop operations. For example, a small win 4 (left bell) wins when the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 110, and a small win 5 (middle bell) wins when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 111. A small win 6 (right bell) is won when the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 112 . Hereinafter, the small wins 4 to 6 may be collectively referred to as push-order bells. In addition, the order of stop operation for winning the internally won push order bell is also called the correct order of stop operation.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations for each RT.

FIG. 61 shows 12 types of internal winning combinations (condition device numbers 1 to 10), which are combinations of the combinations explained in FIG. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by lottery at the start of the game.

Condition device numbers 1 and 2 are both internally winning combinations including special combination 1. Of these, condition device number 1 is an internal winning combination in which special combination 1 is won alone and there is no duplication with other combinations. When this winning combination is won internally, it becomes possible to win a special winning combination 1 (transition to a special game state (RT2)), but if no prize is won, a transition is made to a special winning internal winning state (RT1). In this case, unless another winning combination is internally won in the next and subsequent games, the special winning combination 1 can be continuously won.

On the other hand, the condition device number 2 is an internal winning combination in which the special combination 1 and another combination are duplicated and internally won. In the basic embodiment, the small winning combination and the replay winning combination are stopped with priority over the special winning combination. Therefore, in a game in which the special role 1 and another role are duplicated and internally won, there is a possibility that this other role will win (in the case of a replay role, the prize will always be won), but the special role 1 will win. do not do. It should be noted that the special combination internal winning state (RT1) is entered from the next game, and the special combination 1 can continue to be won as long as no other combination is internally won in the next and subsequent games.

Conditional device numbers 3 and 4 are internal winning hands made up of replayed hands.

In addition, in the condition device numbers 2 and 4, the replay combination 1 and the replay combination 2 are won in duplicate. When these conditional devices are internally won, if a predetermined stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, and if any other stop operation is performed, the replay combination 1 is displayed. Stop control is executed so that the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. In the basic embodiment, the predetermined stop operation is the left first stop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, not only the first stop operation but also the second stop operation may be included in the predetermined stop operation. Alternatively, the timing of the stop operation may be the predetermined stop operation described above, or a combination thereof, and any operation condition may be adopted.

Condition device numbers 5 to 10 are internal winning hands made up of small hands. Of these, the condition device numbers 8 to 10 are provided with operation conditions (push order here, correct push order below) for winning the corresponding minor combination (left bell, middle bell, right bell). In the following description, the conditional device numbers 8 to 10 may be collectively referred to as push order bells. In the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the order of pressing the correct answer, it may be lost. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

In the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 61, the horizontal axis represents each game state (RT), and the vertical axis represents each lottery value (size of lottery data range). In each RT to be described later, the internal winning probability of a role is determined by selecting numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, and using random values acquired during the internal lottery. is obtained by dividing by numerical data (for example, 65536) in the range of . For example, in the replay low probability state (RT0), the lottery value of special role 1 is 50, and the winning probability of special role 1 is 50/65536*100≈0.06%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination (internal winning combination) is determined. Setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared for the lottery data with different winning probabilities of at least one combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values.

In the basic embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the condition devices with condition device numbers 8 to 10 for each game state are uniform, but the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If you do not win the role of each condition device, you will lose, and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the role will not be displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that you did not win the role of any of the conditional devices is expressed as "won wrong".

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 56, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.

<Types of game status (RT)>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be described. FIG. 62 is a transition diagram of the gaming state (RT) of the slot machine 100. As shown in FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between a plurality of types of states with different degrees of advantage, namely, a replay low probability state, a special role internal winning state, and a special game state. The degree is changed to improve the amusement of the game. In the following description, this game state may be referred to as RT, and the replay low probability state, the special role internal winning state, and the special game state may be referred to as RT0, RT1, and RT2, respectively. be. Also, when these RTs are switched, the corresponding lottery table is changed (described later). RT is controlled by the main controller 300 .

FIG. 62 shows each RT described above, and these transition conditions are indicated on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, RT transitions in the direction of that arrow. These transition conditions include, for example, winning a predetermined winning combination, internal winning of a predetermined winning combination, stop display of a specific symbol combination on a specific winning line, and completion of a specified number of games. , and a predetermined number of coins may be paid out.

Hereinafter, each RT will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings.

<Replay low probability state (RT0)>
RT0 has a lower internal winning probability of a replay role than RT1, and is the most disadvantageous RT for the player.

There are conditional device numbers 1 to 10 for internally won hands in RT0. If the winning combination is not won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, the fact that the role was not won may be expressed as "won't win".

FIG. 62 shows that when the special combination 1 is internally won while RT0 is set, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state, which will be described later.

<Special role internal elected state (RT1)>
RT1 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON. Also, the probability of winning a replay role is higher than RT0, and RT is more advantageous than RT0.

There are condition device numbers 3 to 10 in RT1 for internally won hands.

FIG. 62 shows that when the special combination 1 is won in RT1 (when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed), the process proceeds to RT2.

<Special game state (RT2)>
RT2 is an advantageous RT in which the internal winning probability of Bell (small combination 3) is higher than in other RTs and medals can be easily obtained.

The condition device number 7 is the only internal winning combination in RT2. A small winning combination 3 that is internally won with the condition device number 7 is a winning combination that wins a bell regardless of operation conditions (operation timing, operation order) if internally won.

FIG. 62 shows that in RT2, when the payout exceeds the specified number (324, see the remarks column in FIG. 60), the process shifts to RT0.

In the basic embodiment, the RT2 is terminated when a specified number of payouts or more are executed. 8 times), or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) is played, the game may end.

<Unadvantageous Sections and Advantageous Sections>
In the slot machine 100 of the basic embodiment, apart from the above-described RT, the game state is divided into non-advantageous intervals and advantageous intervals for management. Of these, in the advantageous section, notification of the stop operation order for the internally won combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation navigation) is allowed, and in the non-advantageous section, this operation navigation is not displayed. In addition, the operation navigation is displayed according to the conditions in the advantageous section, but the operation navigation may not be displayed even if the push order bell is internally elected. These states will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100 .

In the basic embodiment, the initial state (eg, factory default state) is set to the non-advantageous section. Also, when there is a RAM clear (setting change), this non-advantageous interval is set. The state of the non-advantageous section is referred to as normal state A. In addition, in the basic embodiment, three types of advantageous section states are provided: normal state B, chance state, and AT state. FIG. 63 shows transitions between four states: normal state A, normal state B, chance state, and AT state. In the basic embodiment, the advantageous section flag is set to OFF for a non-advantageous section, and the advantageous section flag is set to ON for an advantageous section. distinguish. In addition, in order to prevent the gambling spirit, when the advantageous section continues over a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), or when the predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400) is exceeded is configured to be a non-advantageous section.

It should be noted that the state of the advantageous section may be only the AT state, or, for example, a premonitory state before shifting to the AT state may be further provided, and is not limited to the configuration of the basic embodiment. . Similarly, there may be multiple types of states for the states of the non-advantageous sections.

Since the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are set separately from the RT, for example, there are cases where the transition to RT2 occurs during the advantageous section. However, in RT2, the push order bell is not internally won, and the operation navigation is not displayed, so for RT2, a non-advantageous section may be set once, and after RT2 is completed, it may return to the advantageous section. . Further, the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and it may be configured such that an internal winning is made at the pressing order bell at RT2 and an operation navigation is displayed.

Each state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section will be described below.

<Normal state A>
In the non-advantageous section (normal state A), a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on the internal winning combination. If the lottery is won, the state shifts to the normal state B in the advantageous section.

<Normal state B>
In the normal state B, the state shifts to the chance state when the conditions for shifting to the chance state are met. Further, when the transition condition is established, the number of games in the chance state is set. Regarding this transition condition, for example, a condition that is established by executing a predetermined number of games in the normal state B, a lottery for transition to each game chance state in the normal state B, and when this lottery is won , conditions to be established when points (any of 1 to 3) added according to the result of one game in normal state B accumulate up to a specified number (100 points), and so on. Conditions can be adopted.

<Chance status>
In the chance state, an AT lottery may be conducted according to the internally won combination. When the AT lottery is not won (the number of AT sets is 0) before the set number of games has passed, the game shifts to the normal state B, and when the number of AT sets is 0, the game shifts to the AT state. When shifting to the AT state, the AT set number is decremented by 1, and the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined number of games (for example, 50).

In the slot machine 100 of the basic embodiment, the AT lottery is executed in the chance state. The AT lottery timing and execution conditions can be arbitrarily adopted.

<AT state>
Next, the AT state will be explained. Below, the AT state may be simply referred to as AT.

In the AT state, when the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally won, an operation navigation showing the correct push order corresponding to each is displayed. Note that this operation navigation is not limited to indicating the pressing order, and may indicate the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for...", or the pressing order and timing. may indicate both. In addition, on the payout number indicator 127, the 7 segments are lit up in a manner corresponding to the pressing order of the correct answer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as navigation lighting). The display on the payout number indicator 127 may also be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the timing of the stop operation, or may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to both the pressing order and the timing. .

In the basic embodiment, the number of AT remaining games is subtracted as the AT state game progresses. Then, when the AT remaining game number becomes 0, if the AT set number is greater than 0, the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined value (eg, 50) again, and if the AT set number is 0, the chance state is entered. conduct a lottery. When the lottery is won, the state shifts to the chance state, and when the lottery is not won, the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section (parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized). Incidentally, when the special game state (RT2) is entered in the middle of the AT state, the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games is stopped, and the subtraction is resumed when RT0 is reached. Note that the number of remaining AT games may be added by winning an additional lottery (executed at the time of internal lottery in the basic embodiment).

The AT state may be started and ended according to a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific game state is reached) without being limited to the configuration using the AT set number or the AT remaining game number.

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or bet buttons 130 and 132 have been operated), and the winning line display lamp 120 is lit according to the medals inserted. Also, when medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (three) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. In this process, the internal winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current RT, and an internal lottery (lottery for the combination) is performed using this table and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. Determine internal winners. As a result of the internal lottery, when any combination (including the active combination) is internally won, the flag for that combination is turned on. Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command including internal winning information indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when a replay is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating that the replay is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the winning combination is executed. If the result of the internal lottery is a loss (non-winning role), preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400 . The internal winning command includes information on the internal winning combination, information on the current advantageous section (if the period is finite, including information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining AT games), and AT lottery. And information that can specify the result of the AT addition lottery is included. Of the above information, the information relating to the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, and may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state, the internal winning command including that the condition device numbers 8 to 10 have been internally won also includes operation instruction information representing the correct operation order of the operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. .

In step S111, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S113, reel rotation start processing is executed on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in timer update processing, which will be described later) is 0, and the reels 110 to 112 are started to rotate. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in the basic embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S115, a reel stop control process is executed. In this processing, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S117.

In step S117, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that the small combination 2 has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control section 400 .

In step S119, if the player wins any winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the payout number indicator 127 is used to display the given number.

In step S121, RT update processing is performed. In this process, RT is transitioned based on the conditions shown in the state transition diagram shown in FIG.

In step S123, game state update processing is performed. Here, based on the result of the game, the status regarding the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section described in FIG. 63 is updated. For example, when the normal state A shifts to the normal state B, the advantageous section flag is set to ON, and when the AT state shifts to the normal state A, the advantageous section flag is set OFF. In addition, preparations are made for transmission of the game state update command. This command includes information on RT, information on non-advantageous intervals and advantageous intervals (for example, advantageous interval flag, number of AT sets and number of AT remaining games).

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in the basic embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on (basically 32.8 ms) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the basic embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to interrupt statuses (acquiring various interrupt statuses based on signals from various sensors 318) are executed. . For example, if the interrupt status is medal insertion processing, medal insertion acceptance processing is performed, and if the interruption status is payout processing, medal payout processing is performed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (if it is ON, it indicates that data is set), command type (in the basic embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever Receipt command, internal winning command, effect command accompanying effect lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110-112, first to third press commands accompanying acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137-139, reel Consists of 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) It is

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 66(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 66(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is expanded, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 66(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 66(c). The first sub-control unit 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the basic embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 66(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 67(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 67(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 67(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 67(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an instruction for image control in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 67(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 67(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 67(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the basic embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 67(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 67(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

At step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425, otherwise a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the presentation scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431. wait for is entered.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

[Configuration of push button]
The push button 600 used as the bet buttons 130 and 132, the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc. will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a perspective view showing a button body 610 that constitutes the push button 600, and FIG. 69 is a sectional view showing the push button 600. As shown in FIG.

The push button 600 has a button body 610 (left-down hatching in FIG. 69), a button base 620 (horizontal and vertical cross-hatching in FIG. 69), and a return spring 630 (diagonal cross-hatching in FIG. 69). The button body 610 includes a button head 611 having transparency, a trunk portion 612 having a slightly smaller diameter than the button head 611, and two buttons provided on the opposite side of the button head 611 with the trunk portion 612 interposed therebetween. It has legs 613 . The button body 612 is a hollow body, and light from a separately provided light emitter (for example, an LED 720 on a substrate 700 to be described later) passes through the button body 612 and hits the button head 611, causing the button head 611 to emit light. configured so that it can The two leg portions 613 are each provided with an engaging portion 614 that engages with the button base 620 . Further, the tip of the leg portion 613 serves as a detection piece for a detection sensor 710, which will be described later.

The push button 600 is in a state in which the button body 610 and the return spring 630 are housed inside the button base 620 . FIG. 69(A) shows the push button 600 in a state where the button body 610 is not pressed (hereinafter referred to as a non-pressed state). In this non-pressed state, the elastic force of the return spring 630 pushes the button body 610 in the direction opposite to the pressing direction, but the locking portion 614 is locked to the button base 620, so the button body 610 can be pressed. It is in a fixed position. When the button body 610 is pressed from this state, the state shown in FIG. 69B (hereinafter referred to as the pressed state) is obtained. In this pressed state, the force of pressing the button body 610 causes the return spring 630 to contract, the locking portion 614 to separate from the button base 620 , and the button body 610 is pushed until the button head 611 is locked by the button base 620 . After that, when the button body 610 is no longer pressed, it returns to the non-pressed state shown in FIG. 69(A). With the configuration described above, the push button 600 allows the button body 610 to move within a certain range.

Next, a configuration for detecting movement due to pressing of the button body 610 described above will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between button body 610 and detection sensor 710. As shown in FIG. 70(A1) and (B1) show the positional relationship when viewed from the same direction as in FIG. FIG. 70(A2) is a view from another angle (side view) so that the leg 613 is sandwiched between the detection sensors 710 in the state of FIG. 70(A1). FIG. 70(B2) is a view from another angle (side view) so that the leg 613 is sandwiched between the detection sensors 710 in the state of FIG. 70(B1). Note that the button base 620 and the return spring 630 are omitted in these figures.

This detection sensor 710 has a light-emitting element 711 and a light-receiving element 712, and a leg portion 613 that moves in the pressing direction when the button body 610 is pressed corresponds to a detection area ( By being inserted into a region where the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 are connected, light shielding is detected. FIGS. 70A1 and 70A2 show that the leg portion 613 is not in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is in the non-pressed state. 70(B1) and (B2) show that the leg portion 613 is in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is in the depressed state. With this configuration, pressing of the push button 600 is detected. In the non-pressed state, the leg 613 is not in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712, but the leg 613 is in a standby state in the space defined by the detection sensor 710. ing. By standing by at this position in a non-pressed state, it is possible to quickly detect that the button body 610 has been pressed. In addition, since the amount of movement of the button body 610 can be reduced in this configuration, the durability of the push button 600 can be improved.

In the push button 600 described above, the leg portion 613 of the button body 610 plays two roles: a detection piece for detecting depression and a locking portion for locking to the button base 620 . In this way, the button body 610 can be made less likely to be damaged by simplifying the structure of both the detection piece and the locking portion. In the example of FIG. 68, a configuration in which a plurality of (two in the drawing) leg portions 613 are provided on the button body 610 has been described, but a configuration in which only one leg portion including a detection piece and a locking portion is provided. may be Further, when a plurality of legs 613 are provided, one leg 613 may be set as a detection target as in the example of FIG. A person who intends to do so can be made to play the role of a dummy detection piece, making it difficult to commit fraud.

In the example of FIG. 68, the leg portion 613 of the button body 610 has a flat shape in the radial direction of the button body 610, but the shape of the leg portion 613 is not limited. As in the example of (A), the leg portion 613 may be flat in the circumferential direction. 71B and 71C show the positional relationship between the leg portion 613 and the detection sensor 710 when the button body 610 of FIG. 71A is employed. FIG. 71(B) shows that the leg 613 is not in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is not pressed, and FIG. 71(C). shows that the leg portion 613 is in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is in the depressed state.

68 and 71A, the configuration in which the locking portion 614 protrudes toward the inside of the button body 610 has been described. The arrangement and orientation of the engaging portion 614 are not limited.

[Detection sensor and board placement for multiple button bodies]
When using the push button 600 described above, a plurality of push buttons 600 may be arranged side by side like the three stop buttons 137 to 139 of the stop button unit 136 in FIG. The positional relationship between the button body 610 and the detection sensor 710 when a plurality of the push buttons 600 described above are arranged will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of the layout of the button body 610 and the detection sensor 710 . It should be noted that illustration of the button base 620 and the return spring 630 is omitted in this figure.

72A, 72B, and 72C show three button bodies 610 (hereinafter referred to as left button body 610L, middle button body 610C, and right button body 610R, respectively) arranged in a direction orthogonal to the pressing direction. )It is shown. These button bodies 610 are provided with a detection sensor 710 for detecting depression of one of the legs 613 . These detection sensors 710 are provided on a common substrate 700 . In addition to the detection sensor 710 , the substrate 700 is provided with three LEDs 720 for individually causing the three button bodies 610 to emit light from the inside, and a harness connector 730 . The harness connector 730 is connected to a harness (connection cable) that connects a device to which the detection signal of the push button 600 is to be sent, such as the substrate of the main control unit 300 .

72A, 72B, and 72C, all of the leg portions 613 of the three button bodies 610 are in a straight line. In FIG. 72A, detection sensor 710 is provided on leg 613 on the side adjacent to each other for left button main body 610L and middle button main body 610C, and detection sensor 710 is provided on left leg 613 of right button main body. is provided. In FIG. 72(B), similarly to FIG. 72(A), for the left button body 610L and the middle button body 610C, the detection sensor 710 is provided on the leg 613 on the side adjacent to each other. 72(A) in that a detection sensor 710 is provided on a leg portion 613 of FIG. In FIG. 72(C), the detection sensors 710 of the three button bodies 610 are all provided on the right leg 613 .

As shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, when a structure in which two detection sensors 710 are arranged close to each other on the substrate 700 is adopted, the size of the substrate 700 can be reduced or a space can be secured on the substrate 700. can be For example, the substrate 700 in FIG. 72(A) is smaller than the substrate 700 in FIG. 72(C). In the example of FIG. 72(A), the size of the substrate 700 can be reduced while the connector 730 is arranged between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button main body 610C and the right button main body 610R. Also, in FIG. 72(B), the distance between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button main body 610C and the right button main body 610R is wider than in the example of FIG. 72(C). In the example of FIG. 72(B), a larger connector 730 can be arranged between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button main body 610C and the right button main body 610R.

The effect of reducing the size of the substrate 700 or securing the space on the substrate 700 described above is achieved by the two adjacent button bodies 610 (the left button body 610L and the middle button body 610C in FIGS. 72A and 72B). It occurs by bringing the detection sensor 710 as close as possible. Such a configuration is not limited to the configuration in which all the leg portions 613 are arranged in a straight line as in the examples of FIGS. Of these, a configuration in which the detection sensor 710 is provided on the leg portion 613 closer to the button body 610 may be adopted.

Also, when the detection sensors 710 of two adjacent button bodies 610 are configured to be as close as possible, the positional relationship between these detection sensors 710 is different from the positional relationship between the button bodies 610 . For example, in FIGS. 72A and 72B, the positional relationship (distance and direction) of the detection sensor 710 of the middle button body 610C with respect to the detection sensor 710 of the left button body 610L, and the position of the middle button body 610C with respect to the left button body 610L. Relationships are different. On the other hand, in FIG. 72C, the positional relationship (distance and direction) of the detection sensor 710 of the middle button body 610C with respect to the detection sensor 710 of the left button body 610L and the positional relationship of the middle button body 610C with respect to the left button body 610L are shown. are the same.

In the configuration of FIG. 72(C), when the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to one of the button bodies 610 is known, the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to the other button bodies 610 can be easily guessed. can be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, when a configuration is adopted in which the positional relationship between the detection sensors 710 in two adjacent button bodies 610 is different from the positional relationship between the button bodies 610, Since the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to the button body 610 is different for each button body 610, fraud can be made difficult. In order to achieve this effect, it is not essential to bring the detection sensors 710 of the two adjacent button bodies 610 as close as possible.

In the example of FIG. 72, the thickness direction of the substrate 700 is the same as the pressing direction, but the orientation of the substrate is not particularly limited. It may be configured to FIG. 73 shows an example of a configuration in which the thickness direction of the substrate 700 is orthogonal to the pressing direction. Depending on the orientation of the substrate 700, the overall size can be made more compact in some cases.

[Operation example of additional notification effect]
As described above, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, when the AT state is set, operation navigation may be executed. FIG. 74(A) shows an example of the background in the AT state, and FIG. 74(B) shows operation navigation superimposed on the background in the AT state shown in FIG. 74(A). An example is shown. In the AT state, the number of remaining AT games is decreased as the game progresses, but this number of remaining AT games may be added. At this time, a configuration is adopted in which an operation means including the chance button 190 is used to execute an effect for informing of the addition. FIG. 74(C) shows an example of an effect prompting the operation of the chance button 190 (hereinafter referred to as a chance button operation display), and FIG. An example of numerical display) is shown. In the examples of FIGS. 74(C) and 74(D), backgrounds different from the backgrounds of FIGS. 74(A) and 74(B) are used. FIG. 74(B) shows an example of displaying operation navigation in a state where the background in the AT state shown in FIG. 74(A) is displayed. may be displayed.

The operation of these effects will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following description of the operation example, the AT state is assumed unless otherwise specified. In addition, operations (corresponding to timings T1 to T6) are performed in the order of start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation, bet operation, and start operation, and the chance button 190 is pressed during these operations. A case where an operation (corresponding to timing TC) interrupts will be described.

[[Operation example (1)]]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) when the number of remaining AT games is added. be. In this example, it is assumed that a winning combination (including loss) other than a replaying combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 75, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 74(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 74(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Next, assume that the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) (timing TC). At this time, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 74(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. In this example, the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4). The same operation is executed by operating the chance button 190 of .

After that, when the third stop operation (timing T4) is performed, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the added G number. Then, when a bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 switches from the display of the number of G added to the background during AT (FIG. 74A), and the display inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 The lamp switches from the lit state to the extinguished state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 74 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[Operation example (2)]]
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of remaining AT games is added. In this example, it is assumed that a winning combination (including loss) other than a replaying combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 76, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) to notify that the lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 74(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 74(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on.

Then, it is assumed that the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) (timing TC). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display content is switched from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 74(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. The lighting state of the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 is maintained.

After that, when the bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the display of the added G number to the background during AT (FIG. 74A), and the display inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 The lamp switches from the lit state to the extinguished state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 74 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[Operation example (3)]]
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the bet operation and the start operation (between timings T5 and T6) when the number of AT remaining games is increased. In this example, it is assumed that a winning combination (including loss) other than a replaying combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 77, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 74(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 74(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on.

Further, it is assumed that a bet operation is performed without operating the chance button 190 (timing T5). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display is switched to the background during AT (FIG. 74(A)) without executing the additional G number display, and the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned off from the lighting state. switch to. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed.

After that, when the chance button 190 is operated before the start operation (timing TC), the effect image display device 157 maintains the background display during AT, and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. . If the chance button 190 is not operated until the next start operation (timing T6), the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state when the start operation is performed. Also, in this example, it is shown that the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally won at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), and operation navigation (Fig. 74 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[Operation example (4)]]
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) when the number of remaining AT games is added. be. In this example, it is assumed that the replay combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 78, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 74(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 74(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Next, assume that the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) (timing TC). At this time, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 74(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. In this example, the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4). The same operation is executed by operating the chance button 190 of .

After that, when the third stop operation (timing T4) is performed, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 do not turn on unlike the examples in FIGS. This is because the replay combination is internally won and no bet operation is required. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the added G number. Therefore, regarding the bet operation (timing T5) after the third stop operation, regardless of whether or not the operation is performed, the display contents of the effect image display device 157 and the lamp states of various buttons are maintained as they are (they do not change). ). Then, when the next start operation is performed (timing T6), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the additional G number display to the background during AT (FIG. 74(A)). As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 74 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[Operation example (5)]]
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of AT remaining games is added. In this example, it is assumed that the replay combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 79, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 74(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 74(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. Here, since the replay role is internally won, no bet operation is required, but the player is prompted to perform the bet operation so as to secure an opportunity to switch the display contents by the bet operation.

Then, it is assumed that the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) (timing TC). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display content is switched from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 74(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. The lighting state of the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 is maintained.

After that, when the bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the display of the added G number to the background during AT (FIG. 74A), and the display inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 The lamp switches from the lit state to the extinguished state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. Here, when the bet operation is not performed after the chance button 190 is operated, similar operations (switching of the display and switching of the lighting mode of the lamp) are executed by the subsequent start operation. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 74 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[Operation example (6)]]
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of AT remaining games is increased. In this example, it is assumed that the replay combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 80, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 74(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 74(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. Here, since the replay role is internally won, no bet operation is required, but the player is prompted to perform the bet operation so as to secure an opportunity to switch the display contents by the bet operation.

Further, it is assumed that a bet operation is performed without operating the chance button 190 (timing T5). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display contents are switched from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 74(D)), and the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are switched from the ON state to the OFF state. At this time, since the operation of the chance button 190 is no longer necessary due to the execution of the display of the number of G to be added, the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. Regarding the operation (timing TC) of the chance button 190 after the bet operation, the display contents of the effect image display device 157 and the status of the lamps of various buttons are maintained (not changed) regardless of whether or not the operation is performed. ).

After that, when the next start operation is performed (timing T6), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the display of the added G number to the background during AT (FIG. 74(A)). As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 74 (B)) is being executed. there is

It should be noted that if the next start operation is performed without performing either the bet operation or the chance button 190 operation after the third stop operation, the display of the effect image display device 157 changes from the chance button operation display to the background during AT. The display is switched to (FIG. 74(A)), the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are switched from the on state to the off state, and the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the on state to the off state.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (1)]
The configuration of the additional notification effect described above makes it possible to display the number of additional Gs using the chance button 190 (for example, FIG. 78), and for a certain period (from the start operation to the third stop operation in the above example). ), if the chance button 190 is not operated, then an opportunity is provided to display the additional G number by operating the chance button 190 or betting (for example, FIGS. 79 and 80). In this configuration, even if the player does not notice that the chance button 190 is operated to display the additional G number, the display of the additional G number can be executed by other operating means. There is, and it is possible to make it easier to execute the additional G number display. It should be noted that the above configuration may be applied not only to the display of the number of G to be added, but also to any notification. Further, the operation means in the above operation example is one example, and may be related to the progress of the game, or may be dedicated to effects.

It should be noted that, in the above configuration, a display prompting the user to operate the operating means, such as a chance button operation display, may be executed. In this case, it may be possible to more reliably perform the notification by operating the operating means. In addition, when the notification is executed by an operation means different from the prompt operation means, the player can be surprised.

Further, the above configuration may be configured such that each operation means is provided with a light emitting means, and the light emitting state can be switched to prompt the user to operate the operation means.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (2)]
The configuration of the additional notification effect described above is such that when the chance button 190 is operated prior to the betting operation in a certain period (after the third stop operation in the above example), the operation of the chance button 190 and the subsequent betting operation are performed. 76 and 79). On the other hand, if the betting operation is performed first, the display content is switched by the betting operation, but the chance button 190 after that is provided. The display contents are not switched by the operation of (eg, FIGS. 77 and 80). With this configuration, it is possible to change the display contents according to the player's operation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Note that display contents to be switched are not limited to various notifications and background displays, and various displays can be used. Further, the operation means in the above operation example is one example, and may be related to the progress of the game, or may be dedicated to effects.

It should be noted that, in the above configuration, a display prompting the user to operate the operating means, such as a chance button operation display, may be executed. In this case, it may be possible to more reliably switch the display contents by operating the operating means. Also, when the display contents are switched by an operation means different from the prompted operation means, the player can be surprised.

Further, the above configuration may be configured such that each operation means is provided with a light emitting means, and the light emitting state can be switched to prompt the user to operate the operation means.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (3)]
In the configuration of the additional notification effect described above, when performing an additional G number display (for example, FIG. 80) for a bet operation in a certain period (after the third stop operation in the above example), the background during AT is displayed In the former case, the following start operation causes the background to be displayed during AT (eg, FIG. 80).

With this configuration, the background can be easily displayed during AT, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Note that these display contents are only examples, and various types of display such as various notifications and background displays may be used. Further, the operation means in the above operation example is one example, and may be related to the progress of the game, or may be dedicated to effects. As for these operation means, each operation means may be provided with a light emitting means so that the light emission state can be switched in order to prompt the user to operate the operation means.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as games. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu game machines, smart balls, etc., which are used as media.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

81 to 110, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. 81 to 110 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 81 to 110 in principle. In the description using FIG. 110, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

FIG. 81 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is paid out. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Moreover, what makes acquisition of this profit easy may be called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than the staff of the game parlor.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A proper number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of lines.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 82, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol. is the middle reel lower symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the right reel upper symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is on the right The symbols displayed on the middle stage of the reel and the symbols displayed on the bottom of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 in the drawing) are called the right reel bottom stage symbols, respectively. 112, three in each vertical direction, nine in total. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is configured so that each pattern is shielded so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. This optical sensor (index sensor shown in FIG. 84) is provided. 730), a light blocking piece (not shown) provided on the reel and having a predetermined length passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. The symbol position on the reel is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the activated line.

A valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid line 114 . The effective line is a line (a line on which a winning judgment is made) on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, is displayed. When the pattern corresponding to stops, it is determined as winning. Here, a line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 in the area within the display window 113 . A line other than the valid line on which winning determination is not performed is referred to as an invalid line.

FIG. 82 shows a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel middle symbol, a right downward line L2 composed of a left reel top symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel bottom symbol, Rising right line L3 composed of left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, upper line L4 composed of left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol and right reel upper symbol, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols are shown. These lines are examples, and for example, a line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel upper symbols, each of the reels 110 to 112 defines an area for one symbol. Anything is fine. Note that, of the lines shown in FIG. 82, the upper line L4 is used as the effective line in this embodiment. The pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a special machine for betting 3 coins, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the lines becomes effective, and when 3 medals are betted, the line L4 becomes effective. (to be used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-sloping line L3 may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines corresponding to the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that the player is in a special game state, which will be described later. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 .

A key hole 140 is also provided in the front door 102. A key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise to unlock, and counterclockwise to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor (not shown) for detecting that the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting an opening/closing piece projecting when the front door 102 is opened.

A first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141 . A first chance button 165 incorporates a first performance lamp, and a second chance button 166 incorporates a second performance lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operating means operated by the player in the performance. A left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirm button. Sometimes.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

A sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 83) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 83) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). . Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be curved.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of light-emitting means, and in this specification, a device using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp. It may be called a lamp, and a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 83 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with its front door opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board 300B (see FIG. 89) is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 having three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the control board housing case 210 . On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board 400B (see FIG. 89) is arranged. be. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub control board housing case 220 . Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a store clerk at an amusement shop, etc.) can open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot operate. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 89) and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264. Above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power supply control board 252B (see FIG. 89) is provided. ) is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252 . The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the hopper unit 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board ( not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 .

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 84 is a perspective view showing the structure of the reel unit 700. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 84, the reel unit 700 includes a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. Connectors 7030, 7031, and 7032 for connecting to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 89) via harnesses MR1 to MR3 (see FIG. 89) are provided on the upper portion of the reel case 702. FIG. Also, the reel case 702 accommodates three reels 110 to 112 . These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by motors 110m, 111m and 112m (see FIG. 89) provided for each reel. Each motor 110m-112m is a stepping motor. The left reel 110 will be described below as an example, but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 are the same. A motor 110m, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back surface to the front surface of the belt-shaped member 710 of the reel 110 are mounted on a mounting base 732. ing.

85(a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 85(b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG.

The backlight module 740 is composed of a reflector 742 and an illumination board 744 detachably attached to the back of the reflector 742 . The reflector 742 has three vertically arranged openings BK1 to BK3 extending from the front side to the back side. Also, two LEDs 745 are arranged on the lighting base 744 at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (positions of Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 82) that are stopped and displayed on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LED 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, when irradiating light, it is configured not to interfere with light irradiated to other positions. As a result, light can be applied to each of the positions Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. For example, by turning on all the LEDs 745, it is possible to illuminate all the symbols visible to the player from behind. In addition, by lighting a part of the symbols, it is possible to illuminate a part of the symbols visible to the player from behind. The number and positions of openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. FIG. 86 shows the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG.

FIG. 86(a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. FIG. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 86(a) has 16 contacts, a rotatable circular rotating portion 190a, and a circular rotating portion 190a protruding outward from the rotating portion 190a. and an instruction unit 190b. Also, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number out of 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values (set values) representing settings. That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to externally output the numerical information indicated by the instruction section 190b as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. When "B" is indicated, the value of hexadecimal "B" is selected, and the information of the value can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 88), which will be described later, receives this detection signal and selects the numerical value (one of the numerical values from 0 to F in hexadecimal) selected by the first selection switch 190. In the first sub-control section 400, the numerical value indicated by the instruction section 190b is treated as the selected setting value.

Instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 86(a), for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 86(b) may be applied, or a slide switch 191 as shown in FIG. A switch 192 may be applied.

A rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 86(b) has 16 contacts, a rotatable ring-shaped rotating portion 191a, and a cutout window 191b formed in the rotating portion 191a. . Also, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied to the bottom of the rotating portion 191a of the rotary switch 191 corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 191a.

The rotary switch 191 selects a numerical value that can be seen through the cutout window 191b, and is configured to be able to output the information of the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 86(b), when the numerical value seen from the notch 191b is "F", it means that the numerical value of hexadecimal F is selected, and the information of the numerical value is represented by a 4-bit binary code. can be output as a detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 88), which will be described later, inputs this detection signal to select a numerical value (in this example, hexadecimal 0 to Any of the numerical values of F) can be detected.

A slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 86(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b having 16 contacts and slidable along the guide groove 192a. Also, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are given corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

With this slide switch 192, the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is positioned is selected, and information on the numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 86(c), when the slide portion 192b is positioned at the position of the numerical value "0", the numerical value of hexadecimal 0 is selected, and the information of the numerical value is converted into a binary number. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 88), which will be described later, selects the position of the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 (0 to F in hexadecimal). Either) can be detected.

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c) is a mechanical switch, it can be operated even when it is not energized. , the selected numerical value (set value) can be retained even when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even when the power is turned off. In addition, since a number (display means) for confirming the selected numerical value is provided, it is easy to confirm the set value, which is highly convenient.

FIG. 86(d) is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. FIG. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 86(d) is composed of the left button 167, the right button 168, and the second chance button 166 functioning as the confirmation button shown in FIG. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 86(a) is an operating means provided at a position where the player cannot operate, the second selection switch 194 can be operated by the player. It is an operating means provided at a position where it can be operated. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected setting value is confirmed. Alternatively, the setting value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the selected setting value is confirmed without pressing the second chance button 166. good too.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to each button when any of second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 is operated. Therefore, first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 88) described later detects which of second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 has been operated by inputting this detection signal. It has a configuration that allows

Instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 86(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 195 , and this cross key 195 may be applied as the second selection switch 194 . Alternatively, two types of operating means may be provided, one of which may also serve as a chance button, or only one of which may be the second selection switch 194 .

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical (mechanical) switch, it cannot operate in a non-energized state and cannot hold the selected numerical value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide storage means for storing the set values. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194 is not backed up, but it may be backed up.

FIG. 86(f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. Left button 167 and right button 168 are also shown in FIG. 86(f). The first chance button 165 is about three times as large as the second chance button 166 .

In addition, under the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, a cut-in display is performed, or one of the chance buttons is used for repeated hit effects, etc., and the other chance button is used as a hidden button. may Here, a hidden button does not suggest or promote the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation suggestion display or the operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, or the built-in effect lamp does not light up). at least one or both), but when the operation means is operated, some kind of production is performed.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194. As shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, setting values that can be selected with the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 are the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operation means provided at a position where the player cannot operate it, and serves as a switch used by the store clerk to select a set value. Only the first selection switch 190 out of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 selects whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode (normal mode). can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, the power saving mode is set only while the demonstration effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration effect is a effect that is started when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without restarting the game after the end of one game. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, the power saving mode is set when the demonstration effect is started in a state where setting to the power saving mode is selected.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is reproduced in a dark state, thereby suppressing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . In addition, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be suppressed by turning off the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. Power is saved. Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157 .

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays either the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. In volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from among seven volume levels. Also, in the non-power saving mode, mute can be selected.

FIG. 87(A) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" shown in FIG. 86(a).

The effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1. The first sound volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The first sound volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 87A displays that the selection value of the seven-stage sound volume level is 0 (0/7) and the characters "mute". In addition, none of the 7 levels of horizontal level display are illuminated. When mute is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sounds from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 are completely inaudible.

FIG. 87(B) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" shown in FIG. 86(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 87(B) displays characters “volume 1/7” indicating that the selected value of the seven-level volume level is 1. In FIG. In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the leftmost first step level is illuminated in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 87(C) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 86(a).

On the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 87(C), characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven-stage volume level is 7 are displayed. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh-stage volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 87(D) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" shown in FIG. 86(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 87(D) displays characters indicating that the volume selection value is exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for giving a presentation of the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the second color (for example, red). In place of the exhibition volume, a special volume that cannot be selected with the second selection switch 194 but can be selected only with the first selection switch 190 may be selected. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one step each time a predetermined time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

FIG. 87(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" shown in FIG. 86(a).

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 87(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. In addition, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays characters indicating power saving mode, selection values of seven levels of volume levels, and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). On the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 87(a), the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-stage volume level is 7 are displayed. there is In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 87(b) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" shown in FIG. 86(a).

In the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 87(b), the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-stage volume level is 1 are displayed. there is In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the first step level at the left end is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to either "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. A power saving mode is selected to be set. Note that even if the power saving mode is selected, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode. be a condition. On the other hand, when the instruction section 190b is set to any one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 86(a), setting the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode is selected. When setting to the non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode is not set even in the demonstration state. Also, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to the non-power saving mode (normal mode).

The volume output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 is the same regardless of whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 87(B) and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 87(b) are the same, and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. The volume output with the selection value and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 87(a) are also the same.

FIG. 87(a) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the player operates the second selection switch 194 while the effect image display device 157 displays the first guide display icon GI1, which will be described later, the effect image display device 157 displays the third volume. A selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). On the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 87(a), characters of "volume 1/5" indicating that the selection value of the volume level in five stages is 1 are displayed. In addition, in the five-stage level display, only the lowest level, the first stage, is illuminated in the fourth color (for example, green). Pressing the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 once raises the level by one step, and pressing the left button 167 once lowers the level by one step. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 87(a), the level does not drop any further. That is, it is not possible to select mute by operating the second selection switch 194 . It should be noted that muting may also be selected by operating the second selection switch 194 .

FIG. 87(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in FIG. 87(a).

On the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 87(a), characters of "volume 5/5" indicating that the selection value of the volume level in five stages is 5 are displayed. In addition, in the five-step vertical level display, all the levels from the first step to the fifth step are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined time.

Seven levels of volume are selected by operating the first selection switch 190, while five levels of volume are selected by operating the second selection switch 194. FIG. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, the volume setting range is from 0 to 127, and the setting values in the seven steps are 18 for the first step, 36 for the second step, 54 for the third step, and 4 steps. The number is 73, the 5th row is 91, the 6th row is 109, and the 7th row is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, the 2nd to 6th stages are left except for the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage. That is, the 2nd step (36) of 7 steps is the 1st step of 5 steps, and the 6th step (109) of 7 steps is the 5th step of 5 steps. Therefore, only the store clerk of the amusement arcade can select the setting value (18) in the 7th stage and the setting value (127) in the 7th stage. In addition, the 1st stage (18) of 7 stages may be the 1st stage of 5 stages, the 5th stage (91) of 7 stages may be the 5th stage of 5 stages, or the 3rd stage of 7 stages (54 ) may be the first stage of the five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of the seven stages may be the fifth stage of the five stages. Alternatively, the set values in the five stages may be 26 in the first stage, 51 in the second stage, 76 in the third stage, 102 in the fourth stage, and 127 in the fifth stage.

With the effect image display device 157 displaying the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and a first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the volume level selection value is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, when the right button 167 is pressed once instead of the left button 167 in the same state, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced with the third volume selection icon SI3. The display shows that the volume selection value is the fourth level. These displays are displayed regardless of what selection value the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 displays. That is, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the left button 167 once causes the selected value to be displayed as 2/5. Also, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value is displayed as 4/5. This is because when the third volume selection icon SI3 is switched to, the selected values up to that point are discarded, and the volume level value of 3/5, which is the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3, is selected again, and the left button is pressed. By operating 167 or right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and the value obtained by changing the initial value by operating the second selection switch 194 is changed to the first value. 3 Displayed by volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the intention of the player can be prioritized. Conversely, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selected value displayed by the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection is selected. By operating the switch 190, a value obtained by changing the previously selected value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the initial value (eg, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without taking over the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a checkout button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a left reel 110 sensor. index sensor, middle reel 111 index sensor, right reel 112 index sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the hopper unit 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. It becomes L level every time. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 controls the drive circuit 322 for driving the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 89) provided for each of the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, and the solenoid provided for the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals. A drive circuit 324 for driving, a drive circuit 326 for driving a motor 180m (see FIG. 89) provided in the hopper unit 180, various lamps 339 (active line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129 includes a driving circuit 328 for driving the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supplied from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 83) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

Each component of the main control section 300 described above is mounted on the main control section board 300B (see FIG. 89).

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. 162 lamp, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-controller 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor 163m (see FIG. 89) of the shutter 163. As shown in FIG. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m according to the command from the CPU404.

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control section 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427 which detects pressing of the first chance button 165 . The switch sensor 427 also detects pressing of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166 , the left button 167 and the right button 168 . Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426 .

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, the first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface.

Each component of the first sub-controller 400 described above is mounted on the first sub-controller board 400B (see FIG. 89).

The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 534 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to this VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-controller 400 transmits to the drive circuit 422 or the second sub-controller 500 a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-controller 500, and controls the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight. The module 740 receives control signals without going through the second sub-controller 500 .

Next, an example of connection between each board such as the power control board, the main control board and the first sub-control board and each unit such as the reel unit, the hopper unit and the effect movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 89 shows a power supply control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 700, a hopper unit 180, and an effect movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163 incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC1 to MC6 and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B. Also, one or a plurality of connectors HC1, RC1 to RC3, DC1 are shown in each of the reel unit 700, the hopper unit 180 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

An island facility installed in a game machine installation office steps down a 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and supplies a 24V AC current to the pachinko machine 100 through a power cord 265 connected to a connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage and a 5V DC voltage in the power control board 252B. In addition, although it may be converted into other DC voltages, the DC voltage of 24V and the DC voltage of 5V will be explained here.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 89 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line and connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Also shown is the power switch 244 also shown in FIG.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V through the harness PM. .

A 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V direct current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a direct current of 5V is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

The main control board 300B may also be supplied with 24V and 5V through separate harnesses, like the first sub-control board 400B. Also, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, like the main control board 300B.

The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 89 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power supply line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power supply line of the main control board 300B. . The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 89 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED24ML is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A hopper motor driving IC 326i and a reel motor driving IC 322i are mounted on the main control board 300B. The hopper motor drive IC 326i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 326 shown in FIG. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. Both the hopper motor drive IC 326i and the reel motor drive IC 322i are supplied with a 24V DC current and a 5V DC current, respectively. Although not shown, the main control board 300B includes the basic circuit 302 shown in FIG. 88, and integrated circuits that configure other drive circuits 324, 328, etc. are also mounted.

The connector MC1 of the main control board 300B, to which the hopper motor drive IC 326i is connected, and the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 are connected by a harness MH. The 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the hopper motor drive IC 326i are supplied to the hopper unit 180 through the harness MH, and the motor 180m provided in the hopper unit 180 can be driven. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 180m is sent from the main control board 300B through the harness MH.

The connector MC2 connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i of the main control board 300B and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR1. A connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected by a harness MR2, and a connector MC4, to which the reel motor drive IC 322i is also connected, and a connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR3. The reel unit 700 is supplied with the 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively, and the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel are driven. become drivable. Control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 700 side are made into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can connect with However, one common harness is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission) and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 89 also shows the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A 24V direct current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B, and a 5V direct current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B. current flows. Also, on the first sub-controller board 400B shown in FIG. 89, there are a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power supply line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current flows, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current flows. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. This movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. A DC current of 24V and a DC current of 5V are supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 88 is configured on the first sub-control board 400B, and integrated circuits configuring other drive circuits 424, 426 and the like are also mounted.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the effect movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The direct current of 24V and the direct current of 5V supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the movable body unit 160U through the harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the movable body unit 160U is driven. be possible. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 also includes a second sub-control section 500 as shown in FIG. 88, and although not shown in FIG. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are supplied through the harnesses shown. Also, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B with a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub-control board 400B.

As described above, the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are electrically connected by the harness MH, and the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are also electrically connected by the harnesses MR1-MR3. Also, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

FIG. 90 shows how the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. The power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. However, it may be in a state where no power is supplied from the island facility (the same shall apply hereinafter). If power is not supplied from the island facility, the power is cut off even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Each reel 110-112 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction even in such a power failure condition.

Any of the monitor LEDs (power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. 89 that lights up in the energized state ) are also extinguished in the power failure state.

However, as shown in FIG. 90, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the motor 110m (see FIG. 89) that rotates the left reel 110 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 89, the induced current generated by the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Lights up due to induced current. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues lighting for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when the manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes off before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. A capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may also be provided on the 5V power supply line.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B this time flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC2 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B emit light. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues lighting for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power line. In addition, since the power control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power line, the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues lighting for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PS1 into the first sub-control board 400B and is supplied from the connector SC1 to the 24V power line. A secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. Also, the induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B flows through the harness PS2 into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the connector SC2 to the 5V power line. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control substrate 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control substrate 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B emit light. There will be Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL continues lighting for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description is a description of the phenomenon that occurs when the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness MR1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or the connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs indicated at 89 are illuminated, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if none of the monitor LEDs, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. connection is suspected.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Even when the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B are lit by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Further, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not normally connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the secondary control 24V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub-control 5V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only monitor LED5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done.

Here, the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in the power failure state has been described, but even when the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in the power failure state, the right reel 112 can be manually rotated in the power failure state. The same is true when rotating. In addition, when the number of reels to be manually rotated increases, the monitor LED emits bright light. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111 and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, the main control 5V monitor LED5ML, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL LEDs used for different purposes from the monitor LED ( For example, even if an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is provided with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in the power failure state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, light is emitted if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a purpose other than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

FIG. 91(a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 83 as viewed obliquely from above.

The connector HC1 shown in FIG. 89 is also shown in the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 91(a). The hopper unit 180 has a storage tank 181 for storing medals and a disk-shaped hopper disc 182 provided on the bottom surface of the storage tank 181 . Part of the hopper disk 182 is visible in FIG. 91(a). The hopper disk 182 is provided with six medal passage holes 1821 spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The medal passage hole 1821 is a hole of a size through which medals, which are game media, can pass. The hopper disk 182 is rotated by the motor 180m (see FIG. 89), and the medals stored in the storage tank 181 are dispensed through the medal passing holes 1821.

FIG. 91(b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated.

FIG. 91(b) shows the hopper disc 182 viewed from directly above, and six medal passage holes 1821 can be seen. Even in the power-off state, the hopper disk 182 can be manually rotated in both forward and reverse directions by inserting a finger into the medal passage hole 1821 .

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, the motor 180m (see FIG. 89) that rotates the hopper disk 182 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 89, the induced current generated by the motor 180m flows through the harness MH into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the hopper motor drive IC 326i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Lights up due to induced current. On the other hand, if the harness MH is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector HC1 and/or the connector MC1, no matter how much the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. However, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, if none of the monitor LEDs, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. connection is suspected.

After that, the induced current generated by the motor 180m of the hopper disk 182 flows through the power control board 252B to the first sub-control board 400B in the same way as the induced current generated by the motor 110m of the left reel 110 described above. If so, the monitor LEDs (24PL, 5PL, 24SL, 5SL) provided on the substrates 252B and 400B are lit. Therefore, similarly to when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, even when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure on the downstream side of the main control board 300B.

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated and the left reel 111 is also manually rotated while the power is off, the number of movable bodies to be manually rotated increases, so that the monitor LED emits bright light. Become.

Moreover, even in the power-off state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 81 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the motor 163m (see FIG. 89) for opening and closing the shutter 163 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 89, the induced current generated by the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the movable body motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. be done. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also adjusted in resistance value by the secondary control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Lights up due to induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B this time flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied from the connector PC3 to the 24V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. In addition, the induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC4 to the 5V power line. The power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control substrate 252B emit light.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B, and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be

The above explanation is for the phenomena that occur when the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, if none of the monitor LEDs, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. A bad connection can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector SC1 and/or the connector PC3, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the secondary control 24V monitor LED24SL and the secondary control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 and a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be controlled by manually opening and closing the shutter 163. ) can be lit.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only LED24ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML out of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 89 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the connection example described with reference to FIG. 89 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In FIG. 92, the connector MC5 and the connector MC6 provided on the main control board 300B are omitted. A hopper relay board 901B is shown between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. It is

The hopper relay board 901B is provided with a connector HRM to which the harness MH1 connected to the connector MC1 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector HRH to which the harness MH2 connected to the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 is connected.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Further, a connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which the harness MR32 connected to the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 is connected are also provided.

Even in the connection example in FIG. 92, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are disconnected or not properly connected, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

Also, even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MH1 and MH2 between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are disconnected or not properly connected, the monitors such as the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML LED does not light up.

In the connection example in FIG. 92, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 89 by providing the hopper relay board 901B and reel relay board 902B. It is more likely that a poor physical connection will occur. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and poor electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

The hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. An induced current is generated by manual operation in the power-off state, and if the monitor LED is normal, these monitor LEDs are also turned on, so that it is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure.

In the description here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, the hopper disk 182 and the shutter 163 are used as the movable bodies, but the movable bodies are not limited to these, and any movable body driven by a motor can be used. good.

The same applies to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 110, and the movable body includes a sprocket rotated by the payout motor in the payout device 152P shown in FIG. The payout motor rotates and stops under the control of the payout control board 170P (see FIG. 110), and when the sprocket is manually rotated in a de-energized state, an induced current is generated in the payout motor. The LED provided on the payout control board 170P and the LED provided on the main control board 156P (see FIG. 110) connected to the payout control board 170P with a harness are turned on by this induced current if normal. do. Also, as in the above description, the induced current flowing into the main control board 156P passes through the power supply control board 182P (see FIG. 110) and flows to the first sub-control board 160P (see FIG. 110). If there is, LEDs provided on the substrates 182P and 160P are turned on. Furthermore, as the movable body, two movable parts are driven by two motors whose rotation is controlled by the first sub-controller, and the effect movable body (for example, Kroon) that is driven by the motor whose rotation is controlled by the main controller. It may be a production movable body or the like.

Furthermore, in place of the LED lamp which is lit by an induced current in the power failure state, a light emitting means such as a 7-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A requirement for the light emitting means is that it be visible.

In the above description, the adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) are used to cause the monitor LED to emit light by the induced current in the power-off state. That is fine, and it is not limited to the adjustment resistor. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems. need to be adjusted.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A game machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 110] characterized by: 』
explained.

That is, the light emitting means may emit light even when the power is off.

After the movable unit that has been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance is installed, whether or not the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the light emitting means. can be checked even when the power is off. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The power failure state may be a state in which the power switch of the game machine is turned off, or a state in which the power switch is turned on but the power cord is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be in a state where power is not supplied from the island facility.

Further, the movable body unit may be a rotating display unit [eg reel unit 700], a prize medium payout unit [eg hopper unit 180], or an effect operation unit [eg effect movable body unit 160U] (same hereafter).

again,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
A game machine comprising a detachable harness (for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 89 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 91) for relaying the board and the movable unit. 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after the movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the amusement machine electrically checks whether the harness is properly connected or whether the harness is disconnected. You can check it even if it is disconnected.

The board may be a board having a main control section [for example, main control boards 300B and 156P], or a board having a sub-control section [for example, first sub-control boards 400B and 160P and second sub-control boards. control board 164P], a board having a payout control unit [for example, payout control board 170P], or a board having a power supply control unit [for example, power supply control boards 252B, 182P]. Alternatively, it may be a relay board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B, a reel relay board 902B].

Further, the board and the movable unit may be relayed by a plurality of harnesses [for example, a plurality of harnesses MR1 to MR3 in parallel, a plurality of harnesses MR11 and MR12 in series].

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, the light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the power is turned on or off. That is, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, and signal monitor) in the energized state, and can be used to confirm the electrical connection in the energized state.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally only by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means.

Further, the game machine according to the embodiment of the present invention includes first light emitting means provided on the first substrate, second light emitting means provided on the power supply device, and a movable body operable by driving the motor. and an operating means (for example, a power switch 244 shown in FIG. 89) provided in the power supply device , wherein the motor comprises the first light emitting means and the first The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness, and the power supply device is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness. The first light emitting means is electrically connected to the first substrate through a second harness, and the first light emitting means operates the movable body by hand to drive the motor in a power cut state. may emit light when the current due to the back electromotive force generated by the first harness flows through the first harness. When the motor is driven and a back electromotive force generated by the motor causes current to flow through the first harness and then the second harness , light may be emitted, and the first light emitting means may emit light. does not move even when the motor is driven, the second light emitting means does not move when the motor is driven, and the position of the second light emitting means is positioned relative to the movable body The first light emitting means is supplied with power from the power supply without passing through the first harness, and the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, the 81), and the movable unit is a reel unit (for example, reel unit 700 shown in FIG. 83) .

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, after attaching the movable unit that has been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is checked whether the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally. It is possible to confirm whether or not the light emitting means emits light even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it can be confirmed whether the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. Further, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally only by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). In some cases, light emission continues even after the motor stops driving [for example, light emission continues due to the charge stored in the capacitor].
A game machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 110] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the above-mentioned special effects, the light emission of the light emitting means can be confirmed even if the movable body is stopped from being operated manually, and the light emission of the light emitting means can be easily confirmed. .

again,
"Capacitors capable of accumulating charges generated by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state [for example, main control 24V capacitor 24MC, power control 24V capacitor 24PC, power control 5V capacitor 5PC, A game machine characterized by comprising a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC]. 』
also explained.

A common electronic component called a capacitor can be used to make it easier to check the light emission of the light emitting means.

again,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
A game machine comprising a detachable harness (for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 89 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 91) for relaying the board and the movable unit. 』
was also explained.

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor in a power-off state.
A game machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 110] characterized by: 』
explained.

After installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance, whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the common light emitting means. It can be checked even when the power is off. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable body unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. . As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The movable body unit may have a fourth movable body [eg, the middle reel 111] that can be operated by driving a fourth motor [eg, the motor 111m].

again,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1, harness MR11 and harness MR12] that relays the board and the first motor;
a detachable third harness [for example, harness MR3, harness MR31 and harness MR32] that relays the board and the third motor;
A game machine comprising: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after the movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the first harness is normally connected or the second harness is also normally connected. Whether the first harness is broken or the second harness is also broken can be confirmed even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the third movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body and the third movable body.

again,
"In a power failure state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, and the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter-electromotive force causes the light-emitting means to emit light. is,
In a power-off state, the light-emitting means is configured to emit light also by a current [eg, an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor. has been
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
a first movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [e.g. hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [e.g. hopper disk 182] operable by driving a second motor [e.g. motor 180m];
A game machine comprising
The first movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The second movable body unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness MH],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power-off state.
A game machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 110] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, after each movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is installed, a common light emission is used to determine whether or not each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed by the presence or absence of light emission of the means. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when each movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether or not each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As described above, there is a special effect that it is easy to confirm whether or not the plurality of movable units are electrically connected normally.

again,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1] that relays the board and the first motor;
a detachable second harness [for example, harness MH] that relays the board and the second motor;
A game machine comprising: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after each movable body unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the first harness is normally connected or the second harness is also normally connected. Whether the first harness is broken or the second harness is also broken can be confirmed even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means can emit light even when the second movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body and the operation of the second movable body.

again,
"In a power failure state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, and the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter-electromotive force causes the light-emitting means to emit light. is,
The light emitting means is configured to emit light also by the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter electromotive force by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power failure state. has been
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first movable unit is electrically connected normally and to confirm whether the second movable unit is normally connected only by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means. It becomes easy to confirm whether or not is electrically connected normally.

According to the above description,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, A light emitting means different from the first light emitting means among signal monitoring LEDs, 7-segment indicators, set value indicators, etc.];
Can be operated by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disc 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, cloon, etc.] a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.],
A game table comprising
The movable unit is electrically connected to the first light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The movable body unit is also electrically connected to the second light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A game machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 110] characterized by: 』
explained.

That is, the first light emitting means may emit light even when power is cut off, and the second light emitting means may also emit light even when power is cut off.

After installing the movable unit that has been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance, whether or not the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the plurality of light emitting means. It can be confirmed even when the game machine is in a power failure state. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light, it becomes easier to visually confirm the game table even without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable unit is attached to the game table at the factory, it is confirmed whether the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game table is in a power failure state. can be done. As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The first light emitting means is connected to a power line of a first voltage [for example, 24 V], and the second light emitting means is connected to a power line of a second voltage [for example, 5 V]. may be connected to The first light emitting means is provided on a first board [eg, main control board 300B], and the second light emitting means is provided on a second board [eg, power supply control board 252B]. may be provided in Alternatively, the first light emitting means may be an LED lamp and the second light emitting means may be a 7-segment display.

again,
"The first light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, the main control boards 300B and 156P, the first sub-control boards 400B and 160P, the power supply control boards 252B and 182P],
The second light emitting means is also provided on the substrate,
A game machine comprising a detachable harness [for example, a harness for supplying power of both 24V and 5V] that relays the board and the movable body unit. 』
also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on a common substrate.

According to this amusement machine, it is easy to visually confirm the periphery of the substrate when the plurality of light emitting means emit light without the light projecting means.

again,
"The first light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is provided on the first board [eg, main control board 300B],
The second light emitting means [for example, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL] is provided on a second board [for example, power control board 252B],
The second substrate is a substrate different from the first substrate,
a detachable harness [for example, harness MH, MR1 to MR3] that relays the first substrate and the movable body unit;
a detachable harness [for example, a harness PM] that relays the first substrate and the second substrate;
A game machine comprising: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit and the first substrate and the first substrate and the second substrate are electrically connected normally.

again,
``The first light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when it is energized [for example, always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the power is turned on or off. That is, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, and signal monitor) in the energized state, and can be used to confirm the electrical connection in the energized state.

again,
``The first light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

again,
"The first light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means is also configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is confirmed whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally only by causing the current to flow through the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means respectively. becomes easier to do.

FIG. 93 shows a demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demonstration effect.

A predetermined time period during which no operation is performed by the player while the animation (non-demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is displayed continuously during the game or after the game ends. When the time (for example, 30 seconds) is reached, the animation is switched to display the demonstration animation. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, the demo animation is roughly divided into five scenes. First, an opening animation (demo animation 1/5) is displayed. In this opening animation, the entire screen of the effect image display device 157 turns white once, after which the corporate logo gradually begins to appear from the back of the white display screen, and finally, as shown in FIG. 93(a). The company logo appears in full. When the opening animation ends, the animation in which the characters appear begins. First, an animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character, Lord appears, is displayed as shown in FIG. 93(b). Also, when an animation in which a character appears is started, a first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157. FIG. This first guide display icon GI1 is an icon that is displayed only during the demonstration effect. That is, it is displayed only in the animation in which the character in the demo animation appears. However, non-demonstration animations may also be displayed. The display of the second selection switch 194 is displayed on the first guidance display icon GI1. That is, the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168 are both displayed in black, and the letters "volume adjustment" are also displayed in black. It is suggested that the output sound from 272 and the output sound from the bass speaker 277 can be adjusted in volume. As described with reference to FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), when the left button 167 is pressed once while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed. When the right button 168 is pressed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is also displayed, and the volume level of the five steps is increased by one step. In addition, the display 166p of the second chance button 166 is displayed in white, and the characters "game information" are also displayed in white, suggesting that the game information will be displayed by operating the second chance button 166. ing.

FIG. 94(a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed.

The game information displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed is a payout table. The payout table shown in FIG. 94(a) indicates that 8 medals are paid out when the symbol combination of Bell-Bell-Bell is aligned on the activated line described with reference to FIG. - It is shown that three medals are paid out when the combination of watermelon symbols is complete. It also shows that two medals are paid out if the cherry symbol stops at the middle symbol. This payout table consists of a plurality of pages, and the payout table shown in FIG. 94(a) is the first page. The first guide display icon GI1 displayed at the lower left of the display screen is replaced with the second guide display icon GI2. In the second guidance display icon GI2, black characters of "move page" are displayed in contrast to the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168, which are displayed in black, and the left button 167 and the right button 168 are operated. It is suggested that you can change the paytable page by doing. When the left button 167 is pressed once while the second guide display icon GI2 is displayed, the payout table page is returned by one page, and when the right button 168 is pressed once, the payout table page is advanced by one page. In addition, the characters "END" are displayed in white against the display 166p of the second chance button 166 displayed in white, and the display of the payout table can be terminated by operating the second chance button 166. is suggested. When the second chance button 166 is pressed, the display of the payout table disappears on the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and the non-demonstration animation starts to be displayed. That is, when the second chance button 166 is operated while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the demonstration effect ends, and when the display of the payout table ends, the display of the non-demonstration animation is started.

The first guide display icon GI1 described above corresponds to an example of the second display, and the display of the payout table corresponds to an example of the response display.

In the demo animation, following the animation in which the main character, the lord, appears as shown in FIG. 93(b), the animation in which the princess appears (demonstration animation 3/5) shown in FIG. 93(c) is displayed. In this animation as well, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. Furthermore, in the demonstration animation, following the animation in which the princess appears, an animation in which an old man appears (demonstration animation 4/5) shown in FIG. 93(d) is displayed. In this animation as well, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. At the end of the demonstration animation, an ending animation (demonstration animation 5/5) is displayed. In this ending animation, a warning display is displayed as shown in FIG. 93(e), and the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared. When the display of the ending animation is completed, the series of demonstration animations ends, and if the demonstration production continues, the above-mentioned opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) returns, the entire screen turns white again, and after that, a series of animations Demonstration animation is displayed repeatedly until some operation is performed.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing, step by step, the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while a non-demonstration animation is being displayed.

In FIG. 95(a), the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord is sitting on the head seat and the old man is reading a letter. This animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 continuously during the game, or is displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the game is over. It is a different animation (hereinafter referred to as "non-demo animation".) In addition, in this non-demonstration animation, the lord's eyes and fan move, and the hands of the old man move.In addition, this non-demonstration animation is displayed. The brightness of the layer on which the non-demonstration animation is displayed in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. Shown are button 165, second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112. In the first chance button 165 shown in a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in white, and in the second chance button 166, the built-in second effect lamp is lit in white. Both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in (a) are lit in white, and the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 86) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white. The three reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 95(a) are illuminated white.

The lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be lit in the same color, blink at the same timing, or be turned off. Alternatively, the lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Further, among the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 86), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off.

In the state shown in FIG. 95(a), the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. 86(a). The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth tier.

In the example shown in FIG. 95 , in order to operate the first selection switch 190 , the store clerk inserts the key into the key hole 140 and turns the inserted key clockwise to unlock and open the front door 102 . Even when the key is used, when the front door 102 is opened, the opening sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened, and the upper speaker 272 outputs a message indicating that the door is open. An error annunciation sound is repeatedly output, and the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of a door opening error by displaying characters such as "Door being opened". The output of the error notification sound for the door opening error and the display of the error display are continued until the front door 102 is closed. Not a few players think that the error notification sound is too loud for other players to hear. Therefore, there is a case where the store clerk of the game store opens the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. By doing so, the opening/closing piece does not protrude, the opening sensor does not detect the opening of the front door 102, and the door opening error is not notified. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 while the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece. The error display of the door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 95(b) and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, switch operation (1) is performed by the store clerk to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 86(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 95(b), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 87(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh stage volume level is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed.

FIG. 96 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 96, time elapses from left to right in the figure, the timing of (c) in FIG. 96 coincides with the timing of FIG. 95 (c), and the timing of (d) in FIG. 95(d), and the timing of (e) in FIG. 96 matches the timing of FIG. 95(e). FIG. 96 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 and the brightness of the animation display on the effect image display device 157, as well as the first effect lamp and the second chance lamp built in the first chance button 165. The lighting modes of various lighting means such as the second effect lamp built into the button 166, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown. .

At the left end of the timing chart of FIG. 96, the effect image display device 157 displays the non-demonstration animation with normal brightness, and also displays the first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the characters "volume 7/7". is shown. Also shown is a state in which the above various light emitting means are lit in white.

Next, the store clerk performs switch operation (2) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 86(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 95(c), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 87(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. Even at the timing of (c) in the timing chart of FIG. 96, the effect image display device 157 displays a non-demonstration animation and the first volume selection icon SI1 with the characters "exhibition volume" displayed. It is shown.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs the switch operation (3) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 86(a).

Until now, the non-power-saving mode setting has been selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th level. state. FIG. 95(d) shows the state immediately after this switch operation (3) is performed. As shown in FIG. 96, the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. 95(d) is as shown in FIG. The time from switch operation (2) to the state shown in FIG. 95(c) is shorter than the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. ) is the same length as the time until the state shown in FIG.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 95(d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 95(c) has the same second volume selection icon SI2 as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 87(a). are displayed in an overlapping manner, and in the subsequent effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 95(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. This exchange of icons is also shown in the time chart shown in FIG.

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 95(e) displays the text "power saving mode". This display indicates that the power saving mode setting has been selected. It does not indicate that the mode has been set. The non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 95(e), and the non-demonstration state remains. Therefore, the power saving mode is not set, and as shown in the timing charts of FIG. 95(e) and FIG. 144R, and the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 86) of each reel 110-112 remain lit white. In addition, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 also remains lit in white. Furthermore, the non-demonstration animation is played in a bright state without being darkened.

FIG. 97 shows the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected by opening the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece while the demo animation is being displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

In FIG. 97(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started to display the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) shown in FIG. 93(a). That is, on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97(a), after the entire display screen turns white once, the company logo, which gradually starts appearing from the back, is displayed in a completely appearing state. Also, the demo animation is played in a bright state without being dark. 97, similarly to FIG. 95, a first chance button 165, a second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown. In addition, the first effect lamp incorporated in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 97(a) is lit in white, and the second effect lamp incorporated in the second chance button 166 is also lit in white. . Also, both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 97(a) are lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 86) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 97(a) are illuminated in white. .

Also in the demonstration effect, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be lit in the same color, blink at the same timing, or be turned off. Alternatively, the lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Furthermore, only the left side lamp 144L of the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 86) may be turned off. Alternatively, the first effect lamp may flash white, and the right side lamp 144R may light red.

97(a), the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth tier.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 97 as well as the example shown in FIG. 95, the amusement store clerk presses the first selection switch 190 while the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. to operate. The error display of the door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97(b) and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, in this example, as in the example shown in FIG. 95, the store clerk performs the switch operation (1) to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 86(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 87(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh stage volume level is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97(b) displays the animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character appears, which was described with reference to FIG. 93(b). The display of the display icon GI1 has started. This first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed overlapping part of the first volume selection icon SI1, but on the contrary, the first volume selection icon SI1 overlaps part of the first guidance display icon GI1. May be displayed overlapping.

Next, the store clerk performs switch operation (2) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 86(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 97(c), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 87(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. Also, on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97(c), the animation (demonstration animation 3/5) in which the princess appears, which was described with reference to FIG. 93(c), is displayed. The guidance display icon GI1 continues to be displayed. The first volume selection icon SI1 of the volume for the exhibition, which started to be displayed after the first guidance display icon GI1, overlaps the first guidance display icon GI1.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs the switch operation (3) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 86(a).

Until now, the non-power-saving mode setting has been selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th level. state.

FIG. 98 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. In this FIG. 98 as well, time elapses from left to right in the figure, as in FIG. Also, the timing of (c) in FIG. 98 matches the timing of FIG. 97(c), and the subsequent timings of (d) to (h) match the timings of FIGS. 97(d) to (h). I am doing it. Further, FIG. 98 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157, and the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, the left side Light emission modes of various light emitting means such as the lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown.

At the left end of the timing chart in FIG. 98, the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which a princess appears (demonstration animation 3/5) in a bright state, and the first animation in which the characters "exhibition volume" are displayed. A state in which the volume selection icon SI1 and the first guidance display icon GI1 are also displayed is shown. Also shown is a state in which the above various light emitting means are lit in white.

FIG. 97(d) is a diagram showing the state immediately after this switch operation (3) is performed. It becomes the one shown at a shorter time interval than the one shown.

When the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration effect is being executed, that is, the demonstration animation is being displayed, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 97(d), the power saving mode has already been set, and the first production lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The provided backlight module 740 is turned off to save power. That is, among the light-emitting means that have lit in white until now, the light-emitting means other than the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 are turned off. While the power saving mode is set, only this second effect lamp continues to light in white. Further, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97(d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(c) has the same second volume selection as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. The icon SI2 is displayed overlapping.

Furthermore, when the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. That is, as described above, if the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the power saving mode is set. is started from the beginning. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 95, even if the user selects to set the power saving mode while the demonstration animation is not displayed, the power saving mode is not set and the demonstration animation is displayed. It doesn't even start from scratch. As shown in the timing chart of FIG. 98, at the timing of FIG. 97(d), while the demonstration animation 3/5 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the opening animation of the demonstration animation (demonstration animation 1/5) is reproduced. is also started.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. Also, the display of the demo animation 3/5 has ended, and the company logo has begun to appear faintly on the display screen that has become entirely white due to the start of the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). Also, the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97(f), the company logo appears quite clearly. It is more difficult to see than the state shown. Also, at the timing of FIG. 97(f), the display of the power saving mode setting display AI for notifying that the power saving mode is set to "power saving mode being set" at the bottom of the display screen is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 97(g), the demo animation begins to darken. When the demo animation starts to darken, it becomes more difficult to see than before it starts to darken, but the visibility of the power saving mode setting AI and the second volume selection icon SI2 does not change, and the power saving mode setting AI and The second volume selection icon SI2 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the power saving mode setting display AI and the brightness of the second volume selection icon SI2 do not change.

At the timing shown in FIG. 97(h), the first guidance display icon GI1 that disappeared once is displayed again. The re-displayed first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed in the foremost layer, and overlaps part of the second volume selection icon SI2 and also overlaps the power saving mode setting display AI. The visibility of the first guidance display icon GI1 is also the same as that of the first guidance display icon GI1 in FIG. 97(b), and the first guidance display icon GI1 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the first guidance display icon GI1 does not change either.

Note that the power saving mode setting display AI may be displayed in the foremost layer and partially overlap the first guidance display icon GI1. Alternatively, the second volume selection icon SI2 may be displayed in the foremost layer, partially overlapping the first guidance display icon GI1, and partially overlapping the power saving mode setting display AI.

The time from when the demonstration animation starts to darken to when it completely darkens on the effect image display device 157 (Fig. 97(g) to Fig. 97(h)) is determined by the first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165, the left The time for which the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight modules 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are extinguished at the timing of FIG. 97(d) is longer. When the demonstration animation suddenly becomes dark, the player may think that the effect image display device 157 is malfunctioning or be surprised. may be noticed by the player.

It should be noted that even if the store clerk performs a switch operation during the display of the demonstration animation in the power saving mode, the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is changed from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 86(a). Display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set the non-power saving mode while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the non-power saving mode is set, and when the non-power saving mode is set, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played dark will now play brightly. Before the demo animation becomes bright, the light emitting means (the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The backlight modules 740) provided in each start to light up. On the other hand, even if you select to switch from power saving mode to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because the non-power saving mode is already set. display is not started from the beginning.

When the second chance button 166 lit in white is pressed in accordance with the first guidance display icon GI1 in the state where the power saving mode is set, the display returns to the non-power saving mode, the display of the demonstration animation ends, and the display of the demonstration animation ends. A payout table shown in 94(a) is displayed. Also, when the left button 167 or the right button 168 is pressed according to the first guidance display icon GI1, the non-power saving mode is restored and the demonstration animation is switched to the non-demonstration animation (for example, the animation of the lord and the old man shown in FIG. 95). ), and the third volume selection icon SI3 described with reference to FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b) is displayed.

Also, if the unlit first chance button 165 is pressed while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non power saving mode. Toji's animation), and a certain production may be started.

FIG. 94(b) shows a display screen displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 97(h).

In the state shown in FIG. 97(h), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 displays the first guidance display icon GI1. As described above, the first guidance display icon GI1 does not include the display of the first chance button 165, and the first guidance display icon GI1 is not a display related to the first chance button 165. FIG. Also, since the power saving mode is being executed, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is turned off. In this state, not only is there no prompt to press the first chance button 165, but there is no suggestion regarding the first chance button 165 either. In spite of this, when the first chance button 165 is operated, a setting suggestion display for the slot machine 100 is displayed as the certain effect. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. The player usually cannot know this setting value, but there are cases where a setting suggestion display is displayed as shown in FIG. 94(b). If only the Lord's character is displayed, it suggests an odd (settings 1, 3, 5) setting. If only the old man character is displayed, it suggests an even (settings 2, 4, 6) setting. If only the princess character is displayed, it suggests that the setting is 3 or higher. If both the lord and princess characters are displayed, it suggests setting 5 or setting 6. When such setting suggestion display is performed, the first chance button 165 corresponds to a hidden button.

Even if the first chance button 165 is pressed in the states of FIGS. 97(d) to 97(g), even if the first chance button 165 is pressed, the effect image display device 157 does not display the setting suggestion display. can be Further, whether or not the setting suggestion display is displayed may be determined by a lottery when the first chance button 165 is pressed, or may be determined by the pressing timing.

FIG. 99 shows the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected by opening the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece while the demo animation is being displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

The example shown in FIG. 99 is an example in which the door opening error is being notified. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 97 in which the error notification of the door open error is stopped will be mainly described.

In the example shown in FIG. 99, the store clerk opens the front door 102 before the demonstration animation starts. At this time, the store clerk opened the front door 102 without holding down the opening/closing piece protruding when the front door 102 is opened, so that the error notification of the door opening error is started. That is, the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of a door opening error by a character display such as "Door is opening", and in FIG. is repeatedly output.

In FIG. 99(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). At the upper left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, there is displayed an error display EI1 indicating a door opening error by displaying characters such as "Door opening". This error display EI1 is displayed on the foremost layer and continues to be displayed until the front door 102 is closed.

In addition, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 99(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is lit in white. Also, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 86) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 99(a) are illuminated in white. .

The store clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 with characters "/7" is displayed. Also, at the lower left, the display of the first guide display icon GI1 has started.

Next, the clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the characters "Exhibition volume" is displayed. A first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left.

Subsequently, the clerk performs switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190, and the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 99(d), the power saving mode has already been set, but only the backlight modules 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are turned off. That is, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is still lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red. Also, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is still lit in white, and the left side lamp 144L is still lit in white. The off state of the backlight module 740 continues until the setting of the power saving mode is completed.

Also, the display of the demonstration animation is started from the beginning, and while the demonstration animation 3/5 in which the princess appears is displayed, the opening animation of the demonstration animation (demonstration animation 1/5) is also started to be reproduced. Furthermore, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 99(d), the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed so as to overlap the first volume selection icon SI1. Even if the power saving mode is set, the error display EI1 remains displayed. The following description is omitted because it is the same as the example shown in FIG. 97 except for the mode of various light emitting means and the point that the error display EI1 is continuously displayed.

In this example as well, during the display of the demonstration animation in the power saving mode, the clerk operated the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to switch from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 86(a). Also in this case, the display of the demo animation is started from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set the non-power saving mode while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the non-power saving mode is set, and when the non-power saving mode is set, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played dark will now play brightly. Before the demo animation becomes bright, the light emitting means (the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The backlight modules 740) provided in each start to light up. On the other hand, even if you select to switch from power saving mode to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because the non-power saving mode is already set. display is not started from the beginning.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing, step by step, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected while the hopper empty error is still occurring.

A motor-driven medal discharge device 180 (see FIG. 83) is provided inside the slot machine 100. During the medal payout operation, the game medals in the bucket run out, and the medal payout sensor detects that a predetermined first time has elapsed. The hopper empty error is reported when the motor is not turned on even when the motor is turned on, and when recovery processing for rotating the motor in the reverse direction fails to recover. If the hopper is empty error, open the front door 102 to replenish the bucket with tokens, press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted into the keyhole 140 to the left. The error is cleared by turning to .

FIG. 100(a) is a diagram showing a state in which an empty hopper error has occurred. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 100(a), the error notification is displayed in the background display of the error notification (background display with diagonal hatching). That is, an error display EI2 such as "error occurred" that cannot specify the error that has occurred, and an error display EI3 that explains how to cancel the hopper empty error such as "replenish medals and press the reset switch". is displayed. It should be noted that an error display indicating an instruction to the player, such as "please call a clerk", may also be provided.

In addition, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 100(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is turned off. Also, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 86) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 100(a) are illuminated in white. .

The amusement store clerk opens the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece, and performs the switch operation (1) of setting the indicating portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 86(a). Since the effect image display device 157 displays an error display EI2 such as "Error Occurred", this error display EI2 is also used to inform the door opening error, and characters such as "Door being opened" shown in FIG. The error display EI of the door opening error by display is not displayed. In addition, an error notification sound for a door opening error such as "the door is open" is not output. It is also possible to output an error notification sound indicating an instruction to the player, such as "Please replenish medals." Alternatively, an error display EI for a door opening error may be displayed, or an error notification sound for a door opening error may be output.

When the store clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 displaying characters "7/7" is displayed overlapping an error display EI2 such as "error occurred". The first volume selection icon SI1 may be displayed in the foremost layer, and if an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please call a clerk" is also displayed, this error display is displayed. are also displayed overlapping each other. Alternatively, an error display EI3 explaining how to remove the hopper empty error may be displayed in the foremost layer.

Next, the clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first sound volume selection icon SI1 is displayed with characters of "meeting sound volume".

Subsequently, the store clerk performs the switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190 to select the setting of the power saving mode, and the volume level is set to the seventh stage volume level. However, since the state shown in FIG. 100(d) is not a state in which the demonstration effect is being executed, the power saving mode is not set and the display of the demonstration animation is not started from the beginning. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 100(d), instead of the first volume selection icon SI1, a second volume selection icon SI2 displaying the characters "power saving mode" displays an error message such as "error occurrence". It is displayed overlapping the display EI2.

Also, in FIG. 100(d), there is no change in the mode of various light emitting means, and only the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 remains off.

In the above explanation, the power saving mode is not set unless the demonstration effect is being executed. However, the power saving mode may be set.

In addition, when the power saving mode is set, the animation is reproduced in a dark state to save power, and the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the Although power is saved by turning off the backlight module 740 shown at 86, power saving may also be performed in other devices. For example, when the power saving mode is set, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 may be lowered, the effect movable body may not be moved, or the movement may be restricted. Alternatively, the brightness of the entire display screen of the effect image display device 157 may be lowered, not limited to animation reproduction. Also, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 may be extinguished. Furthermore, instead of completely extinguishing the light emitting means such as the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, the luminance (light amount) is lowered. Even in the dimmed state, it leads to power saving.

Furthermore, the timing for starting power saving depends on the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (the timing of FIG. 97(d)) and the effect image display device 157 (the timing of FIG. 97 ( Although the timing of g) is different from the timing of g), power saving is started first with the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, and after that, the right side lamp 144R and the effect image display device 157 are started. You may make it start power saving. In addition to the effect image display device 157, a second effect image display device having a small display screen is provided, and the second effect image display device starts power saving first, and the effect image display device 157 starts power saving later. You may do so. In addition, the combination of the light emitting means and the sound output means, the combination of the effect movable body and the display means, the combination of the light emitting means and the effect movable body, the combination of the effect movable body and the sound output means, the combination of the display means and the sound output means, etc. The timing of starting power saving may be varied.

In addition, although the brightness (light amount) of various lamps cannot be selected by operating the first selection switch 190, the brightness (light amount) level of each lamp can also be selected by the first selection switch 190 in the same way as the sound volume level. You may enable it to select by operation.

Next, operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 will be described.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing two examples of operation effects.

101 shows an effect image display device 157, a first chance button 165, a second chance button 166, a left button 167 and a right button 168. FIG. The first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is capable of displaying seven colors (red, orange, ?, green, blue, indigo, and purple) that make up a rainbow, and furthermore, a white color. Luminescent display is also possible. This white luminous display becomes the default luminous display of the first chance button 165 . The second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 is also capable of displaying luminous display of seven colors forming a rainbow like the first luminous display, and white light-emitting display is also available as a default light-emitting display. It is displayable. Note that the second chance button 165 may be configured to display only white light (default light emission).

In the state shown on the left side of FIG. 101(a), the operation presentation has started. This operation effect is an effect started after the end of the game, and is an effect executed only during a period in which the game is not played. That is, the operation effect is an effect that is started when the third stop operation is performed and all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. is started. In addition, the operation effect may be an effect that is continuously executed during the game (while the reels are rotating), an effect that is continuously executed even after the game is started, or an effect that is continuously executed even after the game is started. ) may be executed only.

In the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 101(a), the built-in first effect lamp lights up in the third color (for example, red), and the light emitting display of the third color is displayed. The production image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord is sitting on the upper seat and the old man is reading a letter (this animation is hereinafter referred to as the "large hall animation"). , a first operation prompting display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165 is displayed. The first operation prompting display HD1 here is composed of a character display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165. FIG. The first button display 165D is a display representing the first chance button 165 displaying the light emitting display of the third color, and is displayed in the same state as the actual first chance button 165. FIG.

The start timing of the operation effect may be the timing when the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes, or the timing when the display of the first operation prompting display HD1 is started. The timing at which the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes and the timing at which the display of the first operation prompting display HD1 is started may be the same timing, but the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes. The timing may be faster. Since the timing at which the light emission display changes is earlier, the player's attention is drawn to the first chance button 165, and the change in the light emission display functions as an advance notice of the first operation promotion display HD1. However, the timing at which the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes may be later.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the first chance button 165 is operated on the effect image display device 157 as shown on the right side of FIG. 101(a). An operation result display (response display) displayed in response to this is displayed. The operation result display will be described in detail later, but here, the operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is a display that suggests the degree of expectation by the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of Mr. Lord. Here, the frame display RD21 is the first color (eg, yellow). . Further, the operated first chance button 165 continues to display the luminous display of the third color (for example, red). That is, the display mode does not change after the operation.

In the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 101(b), as in the same figure (a), the built-in first effect lamp lights up in the third color (for example, red). A luminous display is displayed. 101(a), the effect image display device 157 includes a first button display 165D representing a first chance button 165 displaying a light-emitting display of a third color. HD1 is displayed.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. A suggestive operation result display RD20 including a (eg, yellow) frame display RD21 is displayed. On the other hand, in this example, the operated first chance button 165 is turned off, and the light-emitting display of the third color (for example, red) is terminated.

Note that the first operation prompting display HD1 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and even if the first chance button 165 is not operated within this predetermined period of time, the operation result display will be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Is displayed. That is, the operation result display is displayed whether or not the first chance button 165 is operated. You can start the next game after watching. Note that if the first chance button 165 is not operated within a predetermined time, the operation result display may not be displayed.

Next, a characteristic operation presentation in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 will be described.

FIG. 102 is a table summarizing characteristic operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

There are two types of characteristic operation effects described here, which differ in the type of operation result display. One is the first operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, an operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed. The other is a second operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, an operation result display of suggestive display is displayed.

In both the first operation effect and the second operation effect, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 before the operation, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after the operation, and the frames included in the operation result display. There are multiple patterns of display color combinations.

FIG. 102(a) is a table summarizing patterns when the first chance button 165 before operation displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display in the first operation effect. (b) is a table summarizing patterns in the case where the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light-emitting display in the first operation effect. Note that the rainbow color may be a mode in which the display colors are changed one by one continuously to display each of the seven colors forming the rainbow, or the seven colors forming the rainbow may be displayed at once. A mode in which areas are separated and displayed may be used.

In the first operation effect, the effect image display device 157 displays the first operation prompting display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165. However, even if the second chance button 166 is operated, the operation result is displayed. may be displayed. In other words, both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 may become operation valid buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where the default fifth color (eg, white) light-emitting display is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, the third color (eg, red) light-emitting display, or It may be displayed in a fourth color (eg, rainbow colors). Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 is valid only when the second chance button 166 displays a third color (eg, red) light-emitting display or a fourth color (eg, rainbow color) light-emitting display. It can be a button.

The state in which the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the third color (for example, red) is the same as the state shown on the left side of FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b). In addition, in the first operation presentation, there is also a state where the first chance button 165 before the operation is displaying the light emission display of the fourth color (for example, rainbow color). In either state, the effect image display device 157 displays the same first operation prompting display HD1 as the first operation prompting display HD1 shown in FIG. When the first chance button 165 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display that notifies the number of AT-added games. 102(a) and 102(b), the color of the frame display in this operation result display differs according to the number of AT-added games. Also, after being operated, the first chance button 165 changes to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

If both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, even if the second chance button 166 instead of the first chance button 165 is operated, the first chance button 165 However, the second chance button 166 changes to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display, and the second chance button 166 may be the same light emitting display as the light emitting display before the operation, or the first chance button 165 and the Similarly, the luminous display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the light-emitting display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Even if the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the third color (for example, red) luminous display (the table shown in FIG. 102(a)), the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) is displayed. ) is displayed (the table shown in FIG. 102(b)), the color of the frame display in the operation result display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) , the operation result display is not displayed even if the second chance button 166 is pressed, and the operation result display is not displayed unless the first chance button 165 is pressed. Note that the number of AT-added games is determined in advance by a lottery before the first operation effect is started, and the content of the operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games is determined based on the result of the lottery. It is also decided whether or not the second chance button 166 is to be an operation enable button. When the color of the frame display in the operation result display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is accepted in terms of control, but the operation result display is not displayed. Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 itself may not be accepted for control purposes.

FIG. 102(c) is a table summarizing patterns in the case where the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the third color (for example, red) light-emitting display in the second operation presentation. (d) is a table summarizing patterns in the case where the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light-emitting display in the second operation effect.

In the second operation effect as well, the effect image display device 157 displays the first operation promotion display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165, but the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 Both may be operation enable buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where the default fifth color (eg, white) light-emitting display is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, the third color (eg, red) light-emitting display, or It may be displayed in a fourth color (eg, rainbow colors). Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 is valid only when the second chance button 166 displays a third color (eg, red) light-emitting display or a fourth color (eg, rainbow color) light-emitting display. It can be a button.

In the second operation effect as well, before the first chance button 165 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays the same first operation prompting display HD1 as the first operation prompting display HD1 shown in FIG. 101(a). there is In the second operation effect, when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result display of suggestive display (see FIG. 101). be. The color of the frame display in this operation result display differs according to the degree of expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display, as shown in the tables of FIGS. 102(c) and 102(d). Also, in the second operation effect, the first chance button 165 after being operated changes to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Furthermore, in the second operation effect, when both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165. However, the first chance button 165 may change to a luminous display in the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display, and the second chance button 166 may have the same luminous display as the luminous display before the operation. However, like the first chance button 165, it may change to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the light-emitting display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Also, even if the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the luminous display of the third color (for example, red) (the table shown in FIG. 102(c)), the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) is displayed (table shown in FIG. 102(d)), the color of the frame display in the operation result display of the suggestive display is the fourth color (for example, rainbow color). Only when the second chance button 166 is pressed, the suggestive display operation result display is not displayed, and unless the first chance button 165 is pressed, the suggestive display operation result display is not displayed. It should be noted that the result of the expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display (details will be described later, whether or not to shift to the AT state) is determined in advance by a lottery before the second operation effect is started, and the lottery result. In response, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display is determined, and it is also determined whether or not the second chance button 166 is to be an operation valid button. When the color of the frame display in the operation result display of the suggestive display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is accepted as a control, but the operation result of the suggestive display is displayed. It may not be displayed, or may not accept the operation of second chance button 166 itself for control.

It should be noted that in both the first operation effect and the second operation effect, the light emission display before the operation of the first chance button 165 is the first color, the second color, the fifth color, or other colors. The color of the frame display and the light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 after the operation may be other colors.

Also, the first operation effect and the second operation effect may occur at the same time. In this case, both the operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games and the operation result display for suggestive display are displayed. It becomes the same color as the frame display color. It should be noted that the color may be the same as the color of the frame display in the operation result display for notifying the number of additional games.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the relationship of colors in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 103, the luminous display mode of the first chance button 165 is shown in the vertical line on the left side.

The vertical line on the left side shows the light-emitting display state of the first chance button 165 .

The vertical line in the center shows the display mode of the operation result display RD10 that informs the number of AT-added games. For example, +25G displayed in the AT added game number display RD12 indicates that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is added by 25 games. The color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the AT added game number display RD12 is a color corresponding to the number of games added to the number of games in which the AT state is maintained. Note that the color of the frame display RD11 may indicate the reliability of other benefits. For example, in the case of a game feature of accumulating points, the color of the frame display RD11 may be a color corresponding to the number of points.

The vertical line on the right shows the display mode of the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. What is implied here is the level of expectation (reliability) that a player is given a privilege (AT state in this example). When the character display RD22 of the lord inside the frame display RD21 is displayed, an effect for predicting whether or not the above privilege will be granted (in this example, if you win, the above privilege will be granted) The start of the battle effect) is confirmed, and the color of the frame display RD21 indicates the degree of expectation (in this example, the degree of expectation (reliability) of winning the battle effect) to transition to the state in which the above privilege is granted. ). In this sense, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display also corresponds to the display regarding the player's privilege. In addition, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is also a notice display of the start of an effect that predicts whether or not the privilege will be given or not, or a notice display of the start of the effect in the next game. Furthermore, it corresponds to a notice display that a privilege will be given to the player, or a notice display that the player will win the battle effect. Note that the privilege given to the player may be a big bonus or the like in addition to the AT state. Also, instead of the lord character display RD22, a princess character display or an old man character display may be displayed. In the case of displaying a princess character, there is a 50% chance that the effect will be started to predict whether or not the privilege will be granted, and the color of the frame display RD21 will also correspond to that probability (for example, , the first color), and in the case of the character display of the old man, the probability of starting the effect that predicts whether or not the privilege will be granted is 0%, and the color of the frame display RD21 is 0%. may also be colored according to its probability (for example, a fifth color).

In FIGS. 101 to 109, the state in which the first chance button 165 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching.

Also, in FIGS. 101 to 109, the fifth color (for example, white) is represented by vertical hatching. This fifth color corresponds to the default luminescent display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT games added, the fifth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 25 games added. do. Further, the fifth color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 0% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the fifth color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for the transition to the AT state is 0%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of the transition to the AT state is 0%. Corresponds to a color that suggests absolutely no migration.

Also, in FIGS. 101 to 109, the first color (eg, yellow) is represented by hatching directed diagonally downward to the left. This first color corresponds to the first light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games, the first color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is added by 50 games. do. The first color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 25% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the first color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 25%, or that the degree of reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 25%.

In addition, in FIGS. 101 to 109, the second color (eg, blue) is represented by hatching directed diagonally downward to the right. This second color corresponds to the second light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT games added, the second color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 100 games added. do. The second color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 50% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the second color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 50%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 50%.

Also, in FIGS. 101 to 109, the third color (eg, red) is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This third color corresponds to the third light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT games added, the third color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 300 games added. do. The third color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 75% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the third color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 75%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 75%.

Also, in FIGS. 101 to 109, the fourth color (eg, rainbow color) is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This fourth color corresponds to the fourth light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT games added, the fourth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 500 games added. do. The fourth color corresponds to a color that suggests that the expectation level (reliability level) is 100% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the third color corresponds to a color indicating that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 100%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 100%. Corresponds to colors suggesting migration.

In addition, in the explanation here, it was explained that the degree of expectation (reliability) that the privilege is given to the player differs according to the color, but the fifth color, the first color, the second color, The third color, the fourth color, and so on, in order of description, may suggest that the player's degree of advantage increases, or that the degree of expectation (reliability) of various notices increases.

FIG. 104 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation presentation 1 described with reference to FIG. 102(a). FIG. 104 also shows an effect image display device 157, a first chance button 165, a second chance button 166, a left button 167, and a right button 168 as in FIG. 101 (FIGS. 105-109). the same).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 104(a) to 104(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 101, the first operation prompting display HD1 here also includes a character display LD1 telling the user to press the first chance button 165 and the first chance button 165 displaying a light-emitting display of the third color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of each of FIGS. 104(a) to 104(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed from the light-emitting display before the operation. The light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes before the operation result display RD10 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (the same applies to the following examples). By doing so, the display mode of the operation result display RD10 can be suggested in advance by the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165. FIG.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 104(a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +50G is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. A color (eg, red) is changing to a first color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 104(b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +100G is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. It is changing from a color (eg red) to a second color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 104(c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +500G is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a fourth color. It should be noted that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed, and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is also changed, unlike the previous example. do not do.

As described above, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after being operated is the luminous display related to the display of the operation result of the first chance button 165. In some cases, it is possible to obtain information according to the operation. In addition, in the effect image display device 157, various images may be displayed at the same time or various display colors may be used at the same time. The effect represented by the luminous display of the 1-chance button 165 may be easier for the player to understand. Furthermore, since the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after the operation and the display of the operation result of the first chance button 165 are related displays, cohesive effects are developed, and in this respect also, the player can enjoy the effects. easier to understand.

FIG. 105 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 102(b).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 105(a) to 105(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a light-emitting display of a fourth color (for example, rainbow color). A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 consists of a character display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165 displaying the light emitting display of the fourth color. It is configured.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of each of FIGS. 105(a) to 105(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 105(a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +25G is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It is changing from a color (eg rainbow) to a fifth color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 105(b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +300G is displayed in the third color (for example, red), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It is changing from a color (eg rainbow) to a third color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 105(c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +500G is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. remains displayed in the color of Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed unlike the previous example.

FIG. 106 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation presentation 1 described with reference to FIG. 102(c).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 106(a) to 106(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 104, the first operation prompting display HD1 here also includes a character display LD1 telling the user to press the first chance button 165 and the first chance button 165 displaying a light-emitting display of the third color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of FIGS. 106(a) to 106(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed from the light-emitting display before the operation.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 106(a), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a first color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 106(b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of Mr. Lord is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a second color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 106(c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It is changing from a third color (eg red) to a fourth color. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed, and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is also changed, unlike the previous example. do not do.

FIG. 107 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 102(d).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 107(a) to 107(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a light-emitting display of a fourth color (for example, rainbow color). A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 105, the first operation prompting display HD1 here includes a character display LD1 telling the user to press the first chance button 165 and the first chance button 165 displaying the light emitting display of the fourth color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is displayed, the state shown on the right side of each of FIGS. 107(a) to 107(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 107(a), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. color (for example, rainbow colors) to a fifth color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 107(b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of Mr. Lord is displayed in a third color (for example, red), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in a fourth color. color (eg, rainbow colors) to a third color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 107(c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It remains displayed in four colors. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed unlike the previous examples.

Furthermore, another example of operation effects will be described.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing another example of operation presentation.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 108(a) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the first chance button 165 emits light of the third color as shown on the right side of FIG. 108(a). The display has changed to a luminous display of a first color (eg, yellow). In addition, in the central portion of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed. This operation result display RD10 has the same size as the operation result display RD10 described so far, and the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the +100 G AT added game number display RD12 is different from the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165. different and displayed in a second color (eg, blue). On the other hand, an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is also displayed at the lower right of the display screen. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display displayed at the lower right is smaller than the operation result display RD20 described so far, and is displayed in a reduced size. It is displayed in the same first color as the light-emitting display color of the chance button 165 . In other words, although the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 of the reduced suggestive display, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is The suggestive display operation result display RD20 is given priority over the suggestive display operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games, and is displayed in the same color as the frame display RD21 in the suggestive display operation result display RD20. As described above, although the priority of the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 are different, the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 may be displayed at the same time. When the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 are displayed at the same time, when the next game is started, the battle effect is started, and the right to shift to the AT state is stocked by winning the battle effect. That is, even if 100 games are added and the conditions for ending the AT state are satisfied, the stocked right shifts to the AT state again. It should be noted that the battle effect is not started when the next game is started, but when the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (for example, when the added 100 games are completed), the battle effect is started and the battle is started. There may be a case where the player wins the performance and shifts to the AT state again.

Further, as in this example, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the same color as the color of the frame display RD21 in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display, and also the light-emitting display of the first color and the light-emitting display of the first color. It is also possible to alternately display light emitting displays of two colors. Alternatively, half of the light emitting area may be displayed in the first color and the other half in the second color. Furthermore, the area of the light emitting region may be made larger for the priority color. For example, a first color may be displayed in a 3/4 luminous area and a second color may be displayed in a 1/4 luminous area.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 108(b) is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 108(b), the luminous display of the first chance button 165 changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games, but does not display an operation result display RD20 for suggestive display. In the operation result display RD10 shown on the right side of FIG. 108(b), the color of the frame display RD11 is different from the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 and is the second color (for example, blue). In this example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. As a result, the frame display RD21 is displayed in the first color. The display of the operation result display RD20 is hidden. According to the home pages and strategy guides of game machine manufacturers introducing the slot machine 100, the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 does not match the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, a player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is hidden, can display the frame display RD21 in the first color. It can be guessed that the operation result display RD20 of the displayed suggestive display is hidden, which may improve the interest of the game. Also, when there are three or more types of operation result displays, the player cannot know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display is hidden. There is a case where the interest of the game is improved in anticipation of. Alternatively, it is possible to make it so that it is not necessarily hidden. It is possible that the color of the frame display will be inconsistent, and the player does not know whether the display is hidden or not. may improve.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 108(c) is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 108(c), the luminous display of the first chance button 165 changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result display RD20 of suggestive display, but does not display the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 108(c), the color of the frame display RD21 is different from the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 and is the second color (for example, blue). In this example, contrary to the previous example, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is given priority over the operation result display RD10 that informs the number of AT-added games. The display of the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games displayed in color is hidden. According to the home pages and strategy guides of game machine manufacturers introducing the slot machine 100, the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 does not match the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, a player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is not displayed can display the frame display RD11 in the first color. It can be inferred that the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of displayed AT-additional games is not displayed, and the interest in the game may be improved. Also, when there are three or more types of operation result displays, the player cannot know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display is hidden. There is a case where the interest of the game is improved in anticipation of. Alternatively, it is possible to make it so that it is not necessarily hidden. It is possible that the color of the frame display will be inconsistent, and the player does not know whether the display is hidden or not. may improve.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example in which an operation means other than the first chance button 165 is operated in the operation effect.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 109(a) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the end of the game, and the first chance button 165 is displayed with a third color (for example, red) light emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

When the start lever 135 is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the game is started. That is, the three reels 110-112 start rotating. The large hall animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. (response display) kind of display is not displayed. It should be noted that there are cases where another animation (for example, an animation dedicated to the game) is displayed instead of the large hall animation when the game is started. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed to the light-emitting display of the fifth color, that is, the default light-emitting display. Note that the first chance button 165 may be turned off. If the player wants to proceed with the game without looking at the light emitting display or the operation result displays RD10 and RD20 as shown in the example shown in FIG. 104 or the example shown in FIG. be.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 109(b) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. On the other hand, second chance button 166 is in the off state. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

Even if the second chance button 166 in the off state is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, as shown on the right side of FIG. , the luminous display of the first chance button 165 that has not been operated changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). On the other hand, the operated second chance button 166 remains unlit. Further, on the effect image display device 157, an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed as an operation result display (response display) displayed in response to the second chance button 166 being operated. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 109(b), the color of the frame display RD21 is the same first color as the light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 (for example, yellow). In this example, the second chance button 166 is operated without operating the first chance button 165, but the result is the same as the example (example shown in FIG. 106(a)) when the first chance button 165 is operated. It has become. If the second chance button 166 is operated without operating the first chance button 165, the result may be the same as the example shown in FIG. 106B where the first chance button 165 is operated. The result may be the same as the example shown in FIG.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 109(c) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. It is On the other hand, the second chance button 166 displays a fifth color (for example, white) light-emitting display. The first chance button 165 may also display a default fifth color (for example, white), or a color other than the first to fifth colors (sixth A color (eg, green) light emitting display may be displayed. Alternatively, the first chance button 165 may be turned off. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a second operation prompting display HD2 prompting the user to operate the second chance button 166 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. The second operation prompting display HD2 here is composed of a character display LD2 indicating that the second chance button 166 should be pressed, and a second button display 166D representing the second chance button 166 on which the index finger is placed. The second button display 166D is a display including the second chance button 166 displaying the light emitting display of the fifth color, and is displayed in the same state as the actual second chance button 166.例文帳に追加Before the second operation prompting display HD2 is displayed, the first chance button 165 emits light in a sixth color (for example, green) to announce that the second operation prompting display HD2 will be displayed.

When the second chance button 166 is operated while the second operation prompting display HD2 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result of the second chance button 166 as shown on the right side of FIG. 109(c). , an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed. Also in the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 109(c), the color of the frame display RD21 is the first color (for example, yellow). In this example, the second chance button 166 after being operated also displays a light-emitting display of the same first color as the color of the frame display RD21, and the operated means of operation indicates that the operated means of operation has been operated. A light-emitting display in a color common to the color included in the operation result display (response display) displayed in response is displayed. On the other hand, the first chance button 165 continues to display the light-emitting display of the second color (for example, blue), which is different from the light-emitting display color (first color) of the second chance button 166 after the operation. ing.

As described with reference to FIG. 109B, even if the second chance button 166 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the operation result display is displayed, but the second operation prompting display HD2 is displayed. Even if the first chance button 165 is operated during the display, the operation result display (response display) such as the operation result display RD10 for informing the number of AT-added games and the operation result display RD20 for suggestive display are not displayed.

It should be noted that when the second chance button 166 is operated, the first chance button 165 may also display light emission in the first color.

Further, after the operation, the second chance button 166 may remain illuminated in the fifth color, may be extinguished, or may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue). For example, the light-emitting display may change to another color.

Furthermore, in the case where the second chance button 166 is configured to perform only the fifth color light emission display, the second chance button 166 may remain in the fifth color light emission display after being operated. , may be turned off.

Note that both the first button display 165D and the second button display 166D are displayed on the display effect image display device 157 before the display of the operation prompting display such as the first operation prompting display HD1 and the second operation prompting display HD2. In some cases, it may be announced that either one of the first-operation prompting display HD1 and the second-operation prompting display HD2 will be displayed.

In addition, the color of the frame displays RD11 and RD21 changes in both the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games and the operation result display RD20 that is a suggestive display. may change, the color of the kimono of the lord's character may change, or the color of the character display and the color of the dialogue may change. That is, the main color of the operation result display, the most conspicuous color, and the color with the largest display area may change to the light-emitting display color of the operation means after the operation.

Furthermore, in the present specification, the common color does not have to be completely the same, and there may be a difference in shade, and there may be a difference due to different types of devices such as liquid crystal display devices and LEDs. good too. If the hues are similar, such as yellow, blue, and red, they are treated as common colors.

In addition, the display effects on the operating means after the operation may be display effects related to the operation result displays RD10 and RD20, or may be display effects matching the colors of the operation result displays RD10 and RD20. It may be a display effect that makes the result display RD10, RD20 image.

Furthermore, it may be a combination of the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games and the operation result display that suggests the degree of expectation for shifting to a state in which a big bonus is awarded, or an operation that notifies the number of AT-added games. Even if it is a combination of the result display RD10, the operation result display RD20 suggesting the degree of expectation of shifting to the state where the AT state is awarded, and the operation result display suggesting the degree of expectation of shifting to the state where the big bonus is awarded. good.

In summary, the display effects (e.g., light-emitting display) performed by the operation means (e.g., the first chance button 165) after the operation means are displayed on the display means (e.g., the effect image display device 157). It may be displayed during presentation display (for example, operation response display). For example, the color displayed by the display effect performed by the operation means is displayed in the effect display performed by the display means.

Further, the display effects (eg, light emitting display) performed by the operating means after the operating means (eg, first chance button 165) is operated are the first display effect (eg, light emitting display of the first color) and the second display effect (eg, light emitting display of the first color). It is selected from among a plurality of display effects including a display effect (e.g., light emitting display of a second color), and the first display effect is a first effect display A (e.g., , 50 game addition) may be displayed during the display of the operation result display RD10), and the second display effect (for example, a light emitting display in a second color) may be displayed by display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 ) during the display of the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying that 100 games are added). For example, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed during the display of the first effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying that 50 games are added), and the color displayed in the second display effect is It is displayed during the display of the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying that 100 games are added).

Alternatively, the first display effect (for example, light-emitting display of the first color) is the second effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting the degree of expectation of 25%) on the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157). ), and the second display effect (e.g., light-emitting display of a second color) is the second effect display B (e.g., expectation It may be displayed during the display of the operation result display RD20) suggesting a degree of 50%. That is, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed during the display of the second effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation level of 25%), and the color displayed in the second display effect is , is displayed during the display of the second effect display (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation level of 50%).

Furthermore, the third display effect (e.g., luminous display of a third color) performed by operating means (e.g., first chance button 165) is changed to the first display effect (e.g., first color display) after operating the operating means. luminous display), and the third display effect (e.g., luminous display of a third color) performed by the operating means changes to a second display effect (e.g., a luminous display of a second color) after the operation of the operating means luminous display).

In addition, although the slot machine 100 has been described as an example in the description so far, the selection of the volume level by operating the first selection switch 190 described above, the selection of setting to the power saving mode, and the operation It is also applicable to pachinko machines to devise the luminous display after the operation of the means and to associate the luminous display after the operation of the operating means with the mode of the operation result displays RD10 and RD20.

FIG. 110 is a back view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

The pachinko machine 100P has a ball tank 150P, which has an upwardly opening opening at the upper part of the rear surface, for temporarily storing game balls. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding the falling ball through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152P is made of a tubular member, and has therein a payout motor, a sprocket and a payout sensor (not shown). The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have flowed down into the payout device 152P through the tank rail 154P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152P.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control unit. A game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach an upper tray provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P. A ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the drawing, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main control board 156P that constitutes a main control section that performs overall game control processing, and control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the main control section. A first sub-board case 162P that houses the first sub-control board 160P that constitutes the first sub-control unit that performs A second sub-board case 165P that houses a second sub-control board 164P that constitutes a game ball, a payout control unit that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and an error cancellation switch 168P that cancels an error by the operation of a game clerk. A payout board case 172P that houses the payout control board 170P, a launch board case 176P that houses a launch control board 174P that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing related to launching game balls, and a power supply that supplies power to various electrical game machines. A power supply control board 182P comprising a power switch 178P that constitutes a control unit and turns on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180P that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit when operated when the power is turned on is housed. and a CR interface section 186P for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section and the card unit.

The RWM clear switch 180P is a switch that can perform RWM clear (initialization of RAM) by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100P while operating. It should be noted that the RAM clear switch 180P, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on while being operated, gives a predetermined notification (for example, a character display or sound saying "Please press again to clear the RAM", or a character display). and sound), and if the operation is performed again, the RAM may be cleared.

A first selection switch 190P, which is the same as the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 86(a), is arranged on the upper left of the first sub-board case 162P. Since this first selection switch 190P is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 100P, a person who can unlock the front frame door of the pachinko machine 100P (for example, a store clerk, etc.) However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front frame door cannot perform the operation.

The RWM clear switch 180P is arranged on the lower left side of the rear surface, and the first selection switch 190P is arranged on the upper left side of the rear surface. It may be placed at a position far from the gap created when the door is opened), or vice versa.

On the front side (player side) of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. A second effect button that replaces 166 is arranged.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game table comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
The display means displays a first operation result display [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games] when the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. may be displayed,
The first operation means may display a first light-emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light-emitting display] when operated during the display of the first operation prompting display. and
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display in the first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [for example, a common color display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 104(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

By looking at the first operation means even after the operation, it may be possible to obtain information corresponding to the operation. In addition, the display means may display various images at the same time or use various display colors at the same time. The effect represented by the light emission display may be easier for the player to understand. Further, since the first light-emitting display and the first operation result display are related displays, a coherent presentation is developed, which also makes it easier for the player to understand the presentation.

The first operating means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). It can be. Further, the first operation means may execute a display effect instead of the light emission display. For example, an effect in which a certain pattern is displayed may be executed.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [for example, AT state],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first operation result display may be a display relating to the grant amount of the privilege granted to the player, may be a display relating to the granting period of the privilege granted to the player, or may be a display relating to the period during which the privilege is granted to the player. It may be a display related to the granting time of the privilege granted to the person.

again,
"Equipped with a second operating means [for example, a second chance button 166],
When the first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 109(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the player's hand does not cover the first operation means, the first light-emitting display can be easily seen. Further, the first light emitting display is performed by operating the second operation means, which may surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

The second operating means may be capable of displaying light-emitting display. For example, the second operation means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). It can be.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operating means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the game can be played without looking at the first light-emitting display.

It should be noted that the third operation means may be operated to advance the game (for example, start the game).

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. ” to “F”], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can confirm the first light-emitting display even when the power saving mode is set.

The power consumption of the first operating means may be reduced when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting. That is, the first setting may be the power saving mode, and the second setting may be the normal mode (non-power saving mode).

Further, the first operation means may shift to a first state corresponding to the first setting when the first setting is set. The first state may be a turned off state. That is, it may be in a state in which light emission display is not performed.

The display means displays a second display related to the second operation means [for example, the first guidance display icon GI1 ] can be displayed [for example, FIG. 97(h)], the second display is displayed on the display means in the state where the first setting is set, and the second operation means It may be characterized in that when an operation is performed, a display in response to the operation (for example, display of a payout table shown in FIG. 94(a)) is displayed on the display means.

again,
``The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 104(a), etc.] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The amusement machine is a slot machine, and includes a plurality of reels (for example, three reels) each of which stops rotating when a stop operation is performed, and the display means displays the first operation prompting display. can be displayed after a reel that has been rotating the slowest among the plurality of reels is stopped (for example, a third stop operation).

again,
"The first luminescent display has a main luminescent color that is the same color as the display color in the first mode [eg, the mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [eg, the first is the color (yellow) of
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game table comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays a second mode [for example, a mode where the frame display RD11 is in a second color (blue)]. A first operation result display [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games] may be displayed,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays the first mode [for example, the mode where the frame display RD21 is in the first color (yellow)]. A second operation result display [for example, a suggestive display operation result display RD20] may be displayed,
The first operation means may display a first light-emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light-emitting display] when operated during the display of the first operation prompting display. and
The first light emitting display is related to the second operation result display of the first aspect rather than the first operation result display of the second aspect [for example, the display color in the second aspect including a color closer to the display color in the first aspect than
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to suggest an operation result display by the luminous display (the first luminous display) of the first operating means after the operation. That is, if the first light-emitting display is displayed earlier than the operation result display, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation result display displayed on the display means will be displayed in the first mode. . In addition, since the first light emitting display and the second operation result display of the first mode are associated displays, a coherent presentation is developed and the player can easily understand the presentation.

The first operating means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). It can be.

Further, the first light-emitting display may be a light-emitting display unrelated to the first operation result display of the second aspect. The first operating means may display a second light-emitting display when operated during the display of the first operation-promoting display, and the second light-emitting display is the second aspect. It may be a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display.

The second operation result display may be the same type of operation result display as the first operation result display, or may be a different type of operation result display.

The second operation result display may be a display suggesting the player's degree of expectation that a privilege will be awarded. Alternatively, it may be a display of advance notice that a privilege will be given to the player. In the case where it is regarded as the display of the notice in this way, it may be a display showing the reliability of the notice.

again,
"The display means displays both the first operation result display and the second operation result display when the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. may be displayed,
The first operation means may display the first light-emitting display in a state in which both the operation result displays are displayed on the display means [for example, the state shown on the right],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can recognize the operation result display with the high priority by looking at the first operation means.

The first operation means displays both the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode on the display means. The first light-emitting display may be displayed in the state where the light-emitting display is being performed. Alternatively, the first operation means displays both the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode on the display means. The first light-emitting display may always be displayed in the state where the display is on.

Further, the first operating means may display a third light-emitting display in a state in which both of the operation result displays are displayed on the display means, and the third light-emitting display A light emitting display different from the one light emitting display and the second light emitting display may be used. The third light-emitting display may be, for example, a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display and also a light-emitting display related to the second operation result display. good. More specifically, the third light emission display may be a display of alternate light emission of a color common to the display color in the second aspect and a color common to the display color in the first aspect. However, even if it is a display in which a part of the light-emitting region is light-emitting and displayed in the same color as the display color in the second aspect, and the remaining part is light-emitting and displayed in the same color as the display color in the first aspect. good.

again,
"The first operation means is such that the display means is the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode. There is a case where the first light emission display is displayed while only the second operation result display is displayed [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 106(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In addition, the first operation means is such that the display means is the second mode of the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode. The first light emitting display may not be displayed while only the first operation result display is being displayed.

again,
"Both of the operation result displays displayed on the display means are displays in which the second operation result display is displayed smaller than the first operation result display."
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, even if it is difficult for the player to see the high-priority display (the second operation result display) on the display means, the player can see the high-priority operation result display by looking at the first operation means. can be recognized.

again,
"The first operating means may display the first light-emitting display when operated during the display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the right side of FIG. indicated state],
The first light emitting display is the first operation result display [for example, an operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games] in a first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)]. RD10], which is a light-emitting display related to [e.g., a light-emitting display containing a color common to the display color in the first aspect];
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The display color in the first aspect of the first operation result display and the display color in the first aspect of the second operation result display are a common first color [e.g., yellow],
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display in which a main emission color is the first color,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [eg, AT state],
The second operation result display is a display of advance notice that a certain effect [for example, a battle effect that shifts to AT state when winning] will start.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"Equipped with a second operating means [for example, a second chance button 166],
When the first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 109(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operating means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. " to "F"], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, extinguished state or dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 104(a), etc.] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game table comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
The first operating means may display a third light-emitting display during display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 104(a)],
The first operating means may display a first light-emitting display when operated during display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the right side of FIG. situation],
The first operating means may display a second light-emitting display when operated during the display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the right side of FIG. situation],
The first luminescent display is a display including a luminescent color of a first color [e.g., yellow],
The second luminescent display is a display including a luminescent color of a second color [e.g., blue],
The third luminescent display is a display that includes a luminescent color of a third color [e.g., red].
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

It would be uninteresting if the state after operation of the operating means is either to continue the light emission display before operation or to turn off the light, but according to this game machine, you can expect a change in color after operation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The first light emission display is display in which a main emission color is a first color; the second light emission display is display in which a main emission color is a second color; The third luminescent display may be a display in which the main luminescent color is the third color.

Moreover, the display including the emission color of the first color may be the display not including the emission color of the second color and the emission color of the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the emission color of the second color and the emission color of the third color is included, the display including the emission color of the first color most often or the first color It is acceptable if the color of is most conspicuous.

The display including the emission color of the second color may be a display that does not include the emission color of the first color and the emission color of the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first emission color and the third emission color is included, a display that includes the second emission color most often or the second emission color is included. Any display in which the luminescent color of the color of .

The display including the third luminescent color may be a display that does not include the first luminescent color and the second luminescent color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the emission colors of the first color and the second color is included, the display including the emission color of the third color most often or the third emission color is used. Any display in which the luminescent color of is most conspicuous may be used.

Further, the first operating means may display the third light-emitting display when operated during display of the first operation-promoting display.

again,
"The display means is capable of displaying a first suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation that a privilege [for example, AT state] will be granted to the player,
The display means is capable of displaying a second suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation,
The display means is capable of displaying a third suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation,
the first suggestion display is a display including the first color [for example, the frame display RD21 is the operation result display RD20 in which the first color (yellow) is displayed];
the second suggestive display is a display including the second color [for example, the operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is the second color (blue)];
the third suggestive display is a display including the third color [for example, an operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is a third color (red)];
The degree of expectation [for example, 25%] suggested by the first suggestive display is different from the degree of expectation [for example, 50%] suggested by the second suggestive display,
The degree of expectation suggested by the first indication of suggestion is different from the degree of expectation suggested by the third indication of suggestion [for example, 75%],
The degree of expectation suggested by the second suggestive display is different from the degree of expectation suggested by the third suggestive display,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can recognize the degree of expectation by the color of the light-emitting display after operating the first operating means.

The first suggestive display corresponds to the first aspect of the second operation result display, the second suggestive display corresponds to the second aspect of the second operation result display, The third suggestion display may correspond to a third aspect of the second operation result display.

Further, the first suggestive display is a display in which the first color is the most conspicuous among the included colors, and the second suggestive display is a display in which the second color is the most conspicuous among the included colors. The most prominent display, and the third suggestive display may be the display in which the third color is the most prominent among the included colors. The first suggestive display is a display that matches the first color, the second suggestive display is a display that matches the second color, and the third suggestive display is a display that matches the second color. It may be displayed in three colors. The first suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the first color, the second suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the second color, and the third suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the second color. It may be a display that gives an image of three colors.

again,
"The degree of expectation [for example, 25%] suggested by the first suggestion is smaller than the degree of expectation [for example, 75%] suggested by the third suggestion,
The degree of expectation [for example, 50%] suggested by the second suggestion is smaller than the degree of expectation [for example, 75%] suggested by the third suggestion;
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The first color is a color that suggests that the degree of expectation is smaller than the third color, and the second color is a color that suggests that the degree of expectation is smaller than the third color. It may be a suggestive color.

By performing light emitting display with low expectation after operating the first operation means (by changing from the third light emitting display to the first light emitting display or the second light emitting display), the player is kept calm. may be able to

again,
"When the first operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays a first operation result [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games]. is to display
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display in the first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [for example, a common color display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 104(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [for example, AT state],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display has a second mode and a third mode in addition to the first mode,
The first aspect is an aspect including the first color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)],
The second aspect is an aspect including the second color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the second color (blue)],
The third aspect is an aspect including the third color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is a third color (red)].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the aspect including the first color may be an aspect that does not include the second color and the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the second color and the third color is included, the aspect in which the first color is included most or the first color is the most conspicuous Any mode is acceptable.

The mode including the second color may be a case in which the first color and the third color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one color of the first color and the third color is included, the aspect in which the second color is included the most or the second color is the most conspicuous Any mode is acceptable.

The mode including the third color may be a case in which the first color and the second color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first color and the second color is included, a mode in which the third color is included most or the third color is most conspicuous Any mode is acceptable.

again,
"Equipped with a second operating means [for example, a second chance button 166],
When the first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 109(b)],
The first operating means may display the second light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even if the first operating means may display the third light-emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation-promoting display is being displayed, good.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operating means does not display the first light-emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed [for example, FIG. )],
The first operating means does not display the second light-emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation-promoting display is being displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. ” to “F”], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the second light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 104(a), etc.] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"A first device [for example, a first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, and a backlight module 740];
a second device [for example, effect image display device 157];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, setting the instruction unit 190b to one of “9” or “A” to “F” shown in FIG. case] selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game table comprising
When the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device shifts to a first state corresponding to the first setting [eg, extinguished state or dimmed state]. and
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device enters a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is reproduced in a dark state. ],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, after the first device transitions to the first state [for example, FIG. 97(d)], the second device It may shift to the second state [for example, FIG. 97 (g) to (h)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be easier to confirm that the first device has transitioned to the first state and that the second device has transitioned to the second state. That is, due to the time lag, it may be possible to check the first state of the first device and then check the second state of the second device.

again,
"Even if the first setting is selected by operating the selection operating means, the first device does not shift to the first state unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state." ,
The second device does not shift to the second state unless the state is the certain state [for example, the demo state] even if the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The certain state means a state (demonstration state) in which a demonstration effect is being performed.

again,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b is set to "0" shown in FIG. ~ When matched to any of "8"],
the first device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
The second device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"the number of first devices [e.g., six] is greater than the number of second devices [e.g., one];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the first device, which has a large number, and reduce power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [e.g., 0] of the first device in the first state is less than the power consumption of the second device in the second state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect of the first device is higher than that of the second device.

Power consumption in the first device during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption in the second device during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be reduced by preferentially shifting the first device, which consumes a large amount of power, to the first state.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] for controlling the first device;
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said second device;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first device receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
the second device receives the first signal via the second control means;
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the second device to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 97(g) to 97(h)] is longer than the time it takes for the device to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 97(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first device is a first rendering means [e.g., first light emitting means, first display means],
The second device is a second effect means [e.g., second light emitting means, second display means],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second effect means shifts to the second state after the first effect means shifts to the first state. may,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 101],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

note that,
"A game machine comprising a first notification means, a second notification means, and an operation means capable of setting a first effect setting, wherein the operation means is operated to set the first effect setting is set, the first notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting, and thereafter the second notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting. A playground characterized by
also explained.

again,
"The operation means is a means that can set a second effect setting by being operated, and the first effect setting is a setting in which the power consumption of the notification means is suppressed more than the second effect setting. A game machine characterized by:
also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the number of said first notification means is greater than the number of said second notification means."
also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the power consumption of said first notification means during notification of a certain notification is greater than the power consumption of said second notification means during notification of said certain notification."
was also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that said operating means are means that cannot be operated by a player."
also explained.

again,
" A first control means and a second control means are provided, and the first notification means transmits a signal regarding the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. and the second notification means receives a signal related to the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. A playground that features."
also explained.

again,
"The time taken from the notification mode not corresponding to the first effect setting to the notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting is longer for the second notification means than for the first notification means. A playground characterized by a long."
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
selection operation means [for example, first selection switch 190] capable of selecting a first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] according to an operation;
A game table comprising
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected [for example, when the instruction part 190b is set to "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. ], the display means may start displaying the first animation [for example, demo animation] from the beginning [for example, FIG. 97(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to check the first animation from the beginning.

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in Fig. 97] and the first setting is selected, the display means displays the first animation." is to restart the display of the animation from the beginning [for example, FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first animation may be a demonstration animation. The demo animation is an animation that is started to be displayed on the display means after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without restarting the game after the end of one game. In other words, the demo animation is started when the player does not perform any operation while the second animation (non-demonstration animation) is being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). It is an anime that will be played.

again,
``The display means operates when the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 95] while the second animation [for example, the non-demonstration animation shown in FIG. Even if the setting is selected, the display of the first animation is not started from the beginning [for example, the example shown in FIG. 96],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Even if the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 95] and the first setting is selected during display of the second animation, the display means to continue the animation display [for example, FIG. 95(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The second animation may be an animation that is not displayed in the certain state (for example, demo state).

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected during the display of the first animation, the display means displays the first animation that has started to be displayed from the beginning. display in a display mode corresponding to the setting [for example, a darkened display mode] [for example, FIG. 97 (g) to the same figure (h)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Producing means [for example, the first production lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740],
When the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected, the effect means shifts to a first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state]. and
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is reproduced in a dark state]. may migrate,
When the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to the second setting after the effect means shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 97(d)]. state [for example, (g) to (h) in FIG. 97],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Incidentally, the effect means may be a light emitting means. Also, the first state may refer to a state in which the effect means executes the effect corresponding to the first setting. Also, the second state refers to a state in which the first animation is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first setting.

again,
"Even if the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the rendering means is not in a state where the first animation is displayed [for example, a demonstration state]. does not transition to
Even if the first setting is selected by operating the selection operation means, the display means is in the second state unless the first animation is being displayed [for example, a demonstration state]. which does not migrate,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b is set to "0" shown in FIG. ~ When matched to any of "8"],
wherein the effect means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of the production means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of the display means [for example, 1],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the production means having a large number, thereby suppressing the power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [for example, 0] of the rendering means in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect is higher with the presentation means than with the first display means.

Power consumption of the effect means during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption of the display means during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be reduced by preferentially shifting the effect means, which consumes a large amount of power, to the first state.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
`` A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] that controls the effect means,
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said display means;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The effect means receives the first signal from the first control means without passing through the second control means,
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the display means to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIG. 97(g) to FIG. 97(h)] longer than the time required to transition from a state different from one state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 97(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 101],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"first light emitting means [for example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740];
a second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, setting the instruction unit 190b to one of “9” or “A” to “F” shown in FIG. case] selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game table comprising
When the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means shifts to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, an extinguished state or a dimmed state]. is [for example, FIG. 97(d)],
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second light emitting means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, an extinguished state or a dimmed state]. [e.g., remains lit white in FIG. 97(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, the difference between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be recognized by simultaneously recognizing that the state corresponding to the first setting will be changed and that the state will not be changed. It may become easier.

again,
"First operation means [eg, first chance button 165],
a second operating means [for example, the second chance button 166];
with
The first operating means has the first light emitting means [for example, a first effect lamp],
The second operating means has the second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp],
The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power-saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction part 190b can be set to "0" to "0" shown in FIG. When combined with any of "8"],
The first setting is a setting that suppresses the power consumption of the first light emitting means more than the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The player can easily recognize that the first operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the first light emitting means. Also, the player can easily recognize that the second operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the second light emitting means. Further, the first setting is a power saving setting, and the second operating means having the second light emitting means that does not transition to a state corresponding to this setting is operated even if the first setting is set. The player can be made to recognize that it is possible. Moreover, as a result, the load on the first operating means can be reduced.

again,
"Equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
The display means is capable of displaying a second display [for example, a first guide display icon GI1] relating to the second operation means in a state where the first setting is set [for example, FIG. (b) to (d) and (h) in the same figure],
When the second display is displayed on the display means in a state where the first setting is set, and the second operation means is operated, a response display to the operation on the display means [for example, The payout table shown in FIG. 94(a)] is displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The second display may be an operation-promoting display that prompts the operation of the second operating means, or may be an operation-promoting display that suggests the operation of the second operating means. , the second operation means may be displayed. For example, the first guidance display icon GI1 corresponds to this second display.

again,
"When the second display is displayed on the display means in the state where the first setting is set, and the first operation means is operated, a response display to the operation on the display means [for example, , setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 94(b)] may be displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to surprise the player by performing the response display by operating the operating means that is considered to be invalid.

Note that the state in which the first setting is set may be a demonstration state. That is, the power saving setting is set in the demo state. The state in which the response display may be displayed on the display means may be a non-demonstration state (normal state) shifted from the demonstration state. That is, when the first operation means is operated, the demo state is changed to the non-demonstration state (normal state), and even if the first operation means is operated instead of the second operation means, The response display may be performed as an effect, or the first operation means may be a hidden operation means and the game information may be displayed as the response display.

Further, the response display to the operation of the first operation means performed while the second display is displayed may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. There may be.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first setting is set [for example, whether or not the second display is displayed], the display means In response to the operation [for example, the setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 94(b)] may be displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to surprise the player by performing the response display by operating the operating means that is considered to be invalid.

Here, the second display may or may not be displayed on the display means. The response display to the operation of the first operation means performed with the second display hidden may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. good too.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated while the first setting is set, the response display to the operation may not be displayed on the display means.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means may shift to a state corresponding to the first setting,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as "first state") [for example, 97(d)], the display means is in a state corresponding to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, demo A state where animation is played back in a dark state] [for example, FIG. 97 (g) to (h)]
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"Even if the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light-emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demonstration state]. is non-migratory and
The display means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting unless the certain state [for example, demonstration state] is selected even if the first setting is selected by operating the operation means for selection. is
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A certain state means a state (demonstration state) in which a demonstration effect is being performed.

again,
"The power consumption of the first light emitting means is reduced when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting, and
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of said first light emitting means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of said display means [for example, 1],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the first light emitting means, which are numerous in number, and to suppress the power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [e.g., 0] of the first light emitting means in the first state is less than the power consumption of the display means in the second state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect of the first light emitting means is higher than that of the display means.

Power consumption in the first light emitting means during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption in the display means during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be suppressed by preferentially shifting the first light emitting means, which consumes a large amount of power, to the first state.

again,
`` A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] that controls the first light emitting means;
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said display means;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first light emitting means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the display means to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 97(g) to 97(h)] is is longer than the time required to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 97(d)].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 81].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 101],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The prefixes for identification such as "first . For example, "second .." may be replaced with "first ..".

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are limited to those described here. is not. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 symbol display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 liquid crystal display device 272, 277 speaker 420 various lamps 300 main control section 400 first sub-control section 500 second sub-control Department

Claims (1)

a first light emitting means provided on the first substrate;
a second light emitting means provided in the power supply ;
a movable body unit having a movable body operable by being driven by a motor;
an operating means provided in the power supply ;
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness,
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
The power supply device is electrically connected to the first substrate via a second harness,
The first light emitting means emits light when the motor is driven by operating the movable body by hand in a power-off state, and a current due to counter electromotive force generated by the motor flows through the first harness. and
The second light emitting means is configured such that, in a power-off state, the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor, and the current generated by the motor due to the back electromotive force passes through the first harness and further through the second harness. It may emit light by flowing in through ,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
the second light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
the position of the second light emitting means is a position below the movable body ;
The first light emitting means is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the first harness,
The game table is a slot machine,
The movable body unit is a reel unit,
A playground characterized by:

Images